gdb: add target_ops::supports_displaced_step
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b3adc24a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
fa1477dc 34@set PDP11
2a60a7a8
AM
35@set POWERPC
36@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 37@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 38@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
39@set SPU
40@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 41@set WIN32
e0001a05 42@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
43@end ifset
44@c man end
45
9160ea82
AM
46@ifnottex
47@dircategory Software development
48@direntry
252b5132 49* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
50@end direntry
51@end ifnottex
252b5132 52
0e9517a9 53@copying
e49e529d
JM
54This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
55@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
56@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57@end ifset
58version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 59
b3adc24a 60Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 61
cf055d54 62Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 63under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
64or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 67section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 68@end copying
252b5132
RH
69@iftex
70@finalout
71@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 72@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 73@titlepage
71ba23f6 74@title The GNU linker
252b5132 75@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
76@subtitle @code{ld}
77@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79@end ifset
252b5132
RH
80@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81@author Steve Chamberlain
82@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
83@page
84
85@tex
86{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
87\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 89\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
90\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91}
92\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93@end tex
94
95@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 96@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b3adc24a 97Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 138@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
139@ifset ARM
140* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
142@ifset M68HC11
143* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
148@ifset M68K
149* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150@end ifset
833794fc
MR
151@ifset MIPS
152* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
160@ifset S/390
161* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
162@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
163@ifset SPU
164* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
165@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
166@ifset TICOFF
167* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
168@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
169@ifset WIN32
170* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
171@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
172@ifset XTENSA
173* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
174@end ifset
252b5132
RH
175@end ifclear
176@ifclear SingleFormat
177* BFD:: BFD
178@end ifclear
179@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180
181* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
182* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 183* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 184* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 185@end menu
84ec0e6d 186@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
187
188@node Overview
189@chapter Overview
190
191@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
192@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 193
0879a67a 194@ifset man
0285c67d 195@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 196ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
197@c man end
198
199@c man begin SEEALSO
200ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
201the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
202@file{ld}.
203@c man end
204@end ifset
205
206@c man begin DESCRIPTION
207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 209their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 210compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 211
ff5dcc92 212@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
213a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
214to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
215
0285c67d
NC
216@ifset man
217@c For the man only
ece2d90e 218This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
219@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
220language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
221@end ifset
222
252b5132 223@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
224This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
225to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
226write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
227@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
228available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
229@end ifclear
230
231Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
232linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
233execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 234@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
235(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man end
238
252b5132
RH
239@node Invocation
240@chapter Invocation
241
0285c67d
NC
242@c man begin DESCRIPTION
243
ff5dcc92 244The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
245and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
246you have many choices to control its behavior.
247
0285c67d
NC
248@c man end
249
252b5132
RH
250@ifset UsesEnvVars
251@menu
a05a5b64 252* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
253* Environment:: Environment Variables
254@end menu
255
256@node Options
a05a5b64 257@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
258@end ifset
259
260@cindex command line
261@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
262
263@c man begin OPTIONS
264
252b5132
RH
265The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
266practice few of them are used in any particular context.
267@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 268For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
269object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
270link a file @code{hello.o}:
271
272@smallexample
273ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
274@end smallexample
275
ff5dcc92 276This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
277result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
278the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
279directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280
ff5dcc92 281Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
282point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
283as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
284which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
285files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
286different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
287occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
288option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
289noted in the descriptions below.
290
291@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
292Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
293together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
294options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
295an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
296
297Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
298specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
299and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
300are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
301message @samp{No input files}.
302
36f63dca 303If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
304assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
305augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
306linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
307permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
308or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
309@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
310script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
311extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
312to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
313the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
314
315For options whose names are a single letter,
316option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
317whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
318option that requires them.
319
320For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 321precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 322@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 323this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 324only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
325@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
326name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
327output.
328
329Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
330option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
331immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
332@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
333Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
334accepted.
252b5132 335
36f63dca 336Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 337(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
338prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
339compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
340
341@smallexample
2509a395 342 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
343@end smallexample
344
345This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
346silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
347may also arise when passing options that require values through a
348driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
349a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
350and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
351the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
352
353@smallexample
354 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
355@end smallexample
4e53152f 356
a05a5b64 357Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
358linker:
359
ff5dcc92 360@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 361@include at-file.texi
dff70155 362
2509a395
SL
363@kindex -a @var{keyword}
364@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
365This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
366argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
367@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
368@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
369to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370
7ee314fa
AM
371@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
373Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
374@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
375specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
376will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
377finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 378it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 379This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 380interface.
7ee314fa 381
252b5132
RH
382@ifclear SingleFormat
383@cindex binary input format
384@kindex -b @var{format}
385@kindex --format=@var{format}
386@cindex input format
387@cindex input format
388@item -b @var{input-format}
389@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
390@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
391file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 392@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 393that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 394configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 395to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
396default input format the most usual format on each machine.
397@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
398supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
399formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
400@xref{BFD}.
401
402You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
403binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
404linking object files of different formats), by including
405@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 406particular format.
252b5132
RH
407
408The default format is taken from the environment variable
409@code{GNUTARGET}.
410@ifset UsesEnvVars
411@xref{Environment}.
412@end ifset
413You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
414@code{TARGET};
415@ifclear man
416see @ref{Format Commands}.
417@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
418@end ifclear
419
420@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
422@cindex compatibility, MRI
423@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
424@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 425For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 426files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
427@ifclear man
428@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
429@end ifclear
430@ifset man
431the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432@end ifset
433Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 434the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
435scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
436If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
437specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438
439@cindex common allocation
440@kindex -d
441@kindex -dc
442@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 443@item -d
252b5132
RH
444@itemx -dc
445@itemx -dp
446These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
447compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
448even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
449script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
450@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451
7ee314fa
AM
452@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
455@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
456Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
457@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
458specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
459will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
460option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 461The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 462
abf874aa
CL
463@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
465This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
466fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
467section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
468error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
469several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
470section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
471sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
472
473@smallexample
474 MEMORY @{
475 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
476 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
478 @}
479 SECTIONS @{
480 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
481 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
483 @}
484
485 with input sections:
486 .data.1: size 8
487 .data.2: size 0x10
488 .data.3: size 4
489
490 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
491 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
492@end smallexample
493
494This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
495the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
496
497@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
499This option enables warnings when
500@code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
501matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
502discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
503output region.
504
252b5132
RH
505@cindex entry point, from command line
506@kindex -e @var{entry}
507@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 508@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
509@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
510Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
511program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
512named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
513and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
514base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
515@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
516and other ways of specifying the entry point.
517
b58f81ae
DJ
518@kindex --exclude-libs
519@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
520Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 521exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
522@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
523automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
524port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
525explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
526option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
527be treated as hidden.
528
e1c37eb5
DK
529@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
530@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
531Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
532should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
533into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
534may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
535used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
536the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
537match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
538command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
539of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
540regardless of this option.
541
252b5132
RH
542@cindex dynamic symbol table
543@kindex -E
544@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 545@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
546@item -E
547@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
548@itemx --no-export-dynamic
549When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
550option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
551all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
552set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
553
554If you do not use either of these options (or use the
555@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
556dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
557referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
558
559If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
560back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
561dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
562linking the program itself.
563
55255dae 564You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 565be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 566See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 567
8b747e1a
DK
568Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
569support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
570the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
571
37a141bf
FS
572@kindex --export-dynamic-symbol=@var{glob}
573@cindex export dynamic symbol
574@item --export-dynamic-symbol=@var{glob}
575When creating a dynamically linked executable, symbols matching
576@var{glob} will be added to the dynamic symbol table. When creating a
577shared library, references to symbols matching @var{glob} will not be
578bound to the definitions within the shared library. This option is a
579no-op when creating a shared library and @samp{-Bsymbolic} or
580@samp{--dynamic-list} are not specified. This option is only meaningful
581on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
582
583@kindex --export-dynamic-symbol-list=@var{file}
584@cindex export dynamic symbol list
585@item --export-dynamic-symbol-list=@var{file}
586Specify a @samp{--export-dynamic-symbol} for each pattern in the file.
587The format of the file is the same as the version node without
588scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
589
36f63dca 590@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
591@cindex big-endian objects
592@cindex endianness
593@kindex -EB
594@item -EB
595Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
596
597@cindex little-endian objects
598@kindex -EL
599@item -EL
600Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 601@end ifclear
252b5132 602
2509a395
SL
603@kindex -f @var{name}
604@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
605@item -f @var{name}
606@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
607When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
608to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
609table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
610symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
611
612If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
613run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
614the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
615first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
616@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
617in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
618Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
619implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 620machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
621
622This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
623will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
624
2509a395
SL
625@kindex -F @var{name}
626@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 627@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 628@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
629When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
630the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
631of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
632on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
633
634If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
635run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
636dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
637filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
638found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
639used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
640@var{name}.
641
ff5dcc92 642Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 643toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
644object files.
645@ifclear SingleFormat
646The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 647@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 648@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
649environment variable.
650@end ifclear
651The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
652creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 653
3dbf70a2 654@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
655@kindex -fini=@var{name}
656@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
657When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
658executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
659address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
660the function to call.
661
252b5132
RH
662@kindex -g
663@item -g
664Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
665
2509a395
SL
666@kindex -G @var{value}
667@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 668@cindex object size
2509a395 669@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
670@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
671Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
672@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 673MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
674sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
675
676@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 677@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 678@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 679@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
680@itemx -soname=@var{name}
681When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
682the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
683which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
684linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
685field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
686
687@kindex -i
688@cindex incremental link
689@item -i
690Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
691
3dbf70a2 692@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
693@kindex -init=@var{name}
694@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
695When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
696executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
697of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
698function to call.
699
252b5132 700@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 701@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 702@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 703@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
704@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
705Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
706list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
707If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 708will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 709will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 710
ff5dcc92 711On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
712files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
713and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
714called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
715@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
716indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
717to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
718@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
719
720The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
721specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
722was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
723command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
724archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
725the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
726
ff5dcc92 727See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
728archives multiple times.
729
730You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
731
732@ifset GENERIC
733This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 734if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
735behaviour of the AIX linker.
736@end ifset
737
738@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 739@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 740@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 741@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 742@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
743Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
744for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
745option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
746in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
747on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 748@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
749order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
750how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
751option is specified.
252b5132 752
3aa2d05a
NC
753If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
754prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
755@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 756
252b5132
RH
757@ifset UsesEnvVars
758The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 759@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
760some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
761@end ifset
762
763The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
764@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
765at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
766
767@cindex emulation
768@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 769@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
770Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
771emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
772
773If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
774@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
775
776Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
777configured.
778
779@cindex link map
780@kindex -M
781@kindex --print-map
782@item -M
783@itemx --print-map
784Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
785information about the link, including the following:
786
787@itemize @bullet
788@item
3b83e13a 789Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
790@item
791How common symbols are allocated.
792@item
793All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
794which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
795@item
796The values assigned to symbols.
797
798Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
799involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
800have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
801linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
802of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
803the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
804linker script containing:
805
806@smallexample
807 foo = 1
808 foo = foo * 4
809 foo = foo + 8
810@end smallexample
811
812will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
813option is used:
814
815@smallexample
816 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
817 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
818 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
819@end smallexample
820
821See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
822scripts.
d2ef37eb 823
06ddcada
AM
824@item
825How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 826
06ddcada
AM
827When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
828.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
829These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
830
831@smallexample
832Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
833@end smallexample
834
06ddcada 835This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
836merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
837is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
838
839@smallexample
06ddcada 840Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
841@end smallexample
842
06ddcada 843This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
844when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
845is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
846@end itemize
847
035801ce
FS
848@cindex link map discarded
849@kindex --print-map-discarded
850@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
851@item --print-map-discarded
852@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
853Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
854in the link map. Enabled by default.
855
252b5132
RH
856@kindex -n
857@cindex read-only text
858@cindex NMAGIC
859@kindex --nmagic
860@item -n
861@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
862Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
863libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
864mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
865
866@kindex -N
867@kindex --omagic
868@cindex read/write from cmd line
869@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 870@item -N
252b5132
RH
871@itemx --omagic
872Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
873not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
874libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
875mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
876is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
877specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
878
879@kindex --no-omagic
880@cindex OMAGIC
881@item --no-omagic
882This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
883sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
884be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
885shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
886
887@kindex -o @var{output}
888@kindex --output=@var{output}
889@cindex naming the output file
890@item -o @var{output}
891@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 892Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
893option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
894script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
895
896@kindex -O @var{level}
897@cindex generating optimized output
898@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 899If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 900the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
901should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
902option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
903the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
904no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
905of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 906
387dd777
DP
907@kindex -plugin @var{name}
908@item -plugin @var{name}
909Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
910the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
911automatically added by the complier, when using link time
912optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
913wish.
914
915Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
916from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
917@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
918those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
41f37a6f 919copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 920based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 921just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 922
26278bb8
UD
923@kindex --push-state
924@cindex push state governing input file handling
925@item --push-state
926The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
927flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
928restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
929
930The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
931@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
932@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
933@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
934@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
935@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
936
937One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
938used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
939listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
940something as follows:
941
942@smallexample
943-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
944@end smallexample
945
946@kindex --pop-state
947@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 948@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
949Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
950flags governing input file handling.
951
a712da20
NC
952@kindex -q
953@kindex --emit-relocs
954@cindex retain relocations in final executable
955@item -q
956@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 957Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
958Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
959order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
960in larger executables.
961
dbab7a7b
NC
962This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
963
4f471f39
RS
964@kindex --force-dynamic
965@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
966@item --force-dynamic
967Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
968to VxWorks targets.
969
252b5132
RH
970@cindex partial link
971@cindex relocatable output
972@kindex -r
1049f94e 973@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 974@item -r
1049f94e 975@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 976Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 977turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
978linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
979magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
980@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 981@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
982If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
983linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
984constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
985
62bf86b4
HPN
986When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
987partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
988relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
989example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
990with input files in other formats at all.
991
252b5132
RH
992This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
993
994@kindex -R @var{file}
995@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
996@cindex symbol-only input
997@item -R @var{filename}
998@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
999Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
1000relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
1001to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
1002programs. You may use this option more than once.
1003
ff5dcc92 1004For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1005followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1006the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1007
1008@kindex -s
1009@kindex --strip-all
1010@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 1011@item -s
252b5132
RH
1012@itemx --strip-all
1013Omit all symbol information from the output file.
1014
1015@kindex -S
1016@kindex --strip-debug
1017@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -S
252b5132
RH
1019@itemx --strip-debug
1020Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1021
a70f34c0
NC
1022@kindex --strip-discarded
1023@kindex --no-strip-discarded
1024@item --strip-discarded
1025@itemx --no-strip-discarded
1026Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1027Enabled by default.
1028
252b5132
RH
1029@kindex -t
1030@kindex --trace
1031@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 1032@item -t
252b5132 1033@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
1034Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1035@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1036@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1037and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1038a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
1039
1040@kindex -T @var{script}
1041@kindex --script=@var{script}
1042@cindex script files
1043@item -T @var{scriptfile}
1044@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1045Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 1046@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 1047@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
1048output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1049the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1050specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1051options accumulate.
252b5132 1052
14be8564
L
1053@kindex -dT @var{script}
1054@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1055@cindex script files
1056@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1057@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1058Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1059
1060This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1061processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1062command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1063@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1064behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1065command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1066the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1067@samp{gcc}).
1068
252b5132
RH
1069@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex undefined symbol
1072@item -u @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1074Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1075symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1076modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1077different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1078option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1079
0a618243
AB
1080If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1081into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1082undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1083instead.
1084
1085@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1086@cindex symbols, require defined
1087@cindex defined symbol
1088@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1089Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1090is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1091is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1092and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1093@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1094can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1095
252b5132
RH
1096@kindex -Ur
1097@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1098@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1099For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1100@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1101turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1102@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1103It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1104with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1105be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1106@samp{-r} for the others.
1107
c005eb9e
AB
1108@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1109@cindex orphan sections
1110@cindex sections, orphan
1111@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1112Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1113specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1114
1115@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1116
1117@table @code
1118@item place
1119Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1120the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1121@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1122
1123@item discard
1124All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1125@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1126
1127@item warn
1128The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1129issue a warning.
1130
1131@item error
1132The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1133@end table
1134
1135The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1136
577a0623
AM
1137@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1138@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1139Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1140@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1141missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1142specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1143multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1144input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1145in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1146
252b5132
RH
1147@kindex -v
1148@kindex -V
1149@kindex --version
1150@cindex version
1151@item -v
1152@itemx --version
1153@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1154Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1155lists the supported emulations.
1156
1157@kindex -x
1158@kindex --discard-all
1159@cindex deleting local symbols
1160@item -x
1161@itemx --discard-all
1162Delete all local symbols.
1163
1164@kindex -X
1165@kindex --discard-locals
1166@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1167@item -X
252b5132 1168@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1169Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1170system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1171or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1172
1173@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1174@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1175@cindex symbol tracing
1176@item -y @var{symbol}
1177@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1178Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1179option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1180to prepend an underscore.
1181
1182This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1183don't know where the reference is coming from.
1184
1185@kindex -Y @var{path}
1186@item -Y @var{path}
1187Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1188for Solaris compatibility.
1189
1190@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1191@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1192The recognized keywords are:
1193@table @samp
1194
e6e2dfbd
AM
1195@item bndplt
1196Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1197
1198@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1199@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1200@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1201@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1202Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1203to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1204@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1205@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1206@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1207@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1208Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1209
233a0083
L
1210@item cet-report=none
1211@itemx cet-report=warning
1212@itemx cet-report=error
1213Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1214GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1215section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1216linker not report missing properties in input files.
1217@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1218missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1219the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1220Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1221GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1222turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1223Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1224
cd6d6c15 1225@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1226@itemx nocombreloc
1227Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1228dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1229
b8871f35 1230@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1231@itemx nocommon
1232Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1233link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1234
1235@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1236Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1237layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1238using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1239
cd6d6c15 1240@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1241Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1242is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1243This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1244
e6e2dfbd
AM
1245@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1246@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1247Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1248if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1249by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1250@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1251may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1252selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1253these options.
1254
6aa29e7b
JJ
1255@item execstack
1256Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1257
b039ef04
L
1258@item global
1259This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1260the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1261of subsequently loaded libraries.
1262
93ab9c0d
NC
1263@item globalaudit
1264This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1265This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1266setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1267tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1268the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1269all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1270
e6e2dfbd
AM
1271@item ibtplt
1272Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1273Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1274
8df93cb5 1275@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1276Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1277to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1278Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1279
cd6d6c15
NC
1280@item initfirst
1281This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1282It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1283before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1284the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1285the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1286objects.
1287
1288@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1289Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1290so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1291libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1292
5fa222e4
AM
1293@item lazy
1294When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1295dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1296the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1297Lazy binding is the default.
1298
cd6d6c15 1299@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1300Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1301
e6e2dfbd
AM
1302@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1303Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1304
e6e2dfbd
AM
1305@item muldefs
1306Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1307
cd6d6c15 1308@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1309Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1310defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1311
1312@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1313Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1314should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1315
1316@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1317Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1318
1319@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1320Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1321
1322@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1323Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1324
6aa29e7b
JJ
1325@item noexecstack
1326Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1327
e6e2dfbd
AM
1328@item noextern-protected-data
1329Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1330library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1331used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1332generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1333module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1334i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1335
e6e2dfbd
AM
1336@item noreloc-overflow
1337Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1338relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1339overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1340
cd6d6c15
NC
1341@item now
1342When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1343dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1344when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1345function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1346called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1347
1348@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1349Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1350
6aa29e7b 1351@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1352@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1353Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1354specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1355relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1356than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1357Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1358
47acac12
L
1359@item separate-code
1360@itemx noseparate-code
1361Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1362specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1363be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1364code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1365
e6e2dfbd
AM
1366@item shstk
1367Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1368to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1369Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1370
04c3a755 1371@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1372Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1373Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1374@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1375
e6e2dfbd
AM
1376@item text
1377@itemx notext
1378@itemx textoff
a6dbf402
L
1379Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the position-independent
1380or shared object has dynamic relocations in read-only sections. Don't
1381report an error if @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1382
97a232d7
NC
1383@item undefs
1384Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1385either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1386This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1387
cd6d6c15
NC
1388@end table
1389
ece2d90e 1390Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1391
1392@kindex -(
1393@cindex groups of archives
1394@item -( @var{archives} -)
1395@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1396The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1397either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1398
1399The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1400references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1401the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1402archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1403object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1404would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1405they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1406resolved.
1407
1408Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1409it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1410more archives.
1411
69da35b5
NC
1412@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1413@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1414@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1415@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1416Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1417recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1418and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1419the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1420behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1421so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1422restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1423
4a43e768
AM
1424@kindex --as-needed
1425@kindex --no-as-needed
1426@item --as-needed
1427@itemx --no-as-needed
1428This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1429on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1430the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1431on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1432needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1433emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1434non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1435the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1436non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1437Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1438the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1439needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1440from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1441
e56f61be
L
1442@kindex --add-needed
1443@kindex --no-add-needed
1444@item --add-needed
1445@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1446These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1447their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1448options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1449and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1450
252b5132
RH
1451@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1452@item -assert @var{keyword}
1453This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1454
1455@kindex -Bdynamic
1456@kindex -dy
1457@kindex -call_shared
1458@item -Bdynamic
1459@itemx -dy
1460@itemx -call_shared
1461Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1462for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1463default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1464for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1465multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1466@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1467
a1ab1d2a
UD
1468@kindex -Bgroup
1469@item -Bgroup
1470Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1471section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1472object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1473@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1474only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1475
252b5132
RH
1476@kindex -Bstatic
1477@kindex -dn
1478@kindex -non_shared
1479@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1480@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1481@itemx -dn
1482@itemx -non_shared
1483@itemx -static
1484Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1485platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1486variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1487may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1488library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1489option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1490option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1491shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1492references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1493libraries.
252b5132
RH
1494
1495@kindex -Bsymbolic
1496@item -Bsymbolic
1497When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1498definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1499for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1914e264
AM
1500within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1501platforms which support shared libraries.
252b5132 1502
40b36307
L
1503@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1504@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1505When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1506symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307 1507This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1914e264 1508libraries.
40b36307 1509
55255dae
L
1510@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1511@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1512Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1513typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1514global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1515within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1516to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1517in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1518which support shared libraries.
1519
1520The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1521scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1522
40b36307
L
1523@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1524@item --dynamic-list-data
1525Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1526
1527@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1528@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1529Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1530is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1531
0b8a70d9
L
1532@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1533@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1534Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1535
252b5132
RH
1536@kindex --check-sections
1537@kindex --no-check-sections
1538@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1539@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1540Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1541been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1542perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1543suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1544allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1545restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1546Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1547force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1548option.
252b5132 1549
ddbb8a31
NC
1550@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1551@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1552@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1553@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1554This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1555by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1556command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1557output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1558input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1559specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1560follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1561behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1562
1563This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1564libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1565mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1566their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1567required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1568the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1569dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1570symbols.
1571
252b5132
RH
1572@cindex cross reference table
1573@kindex --cref
1574@item --cref
1575Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1576generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1577Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1578
1579The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1580easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1581sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1582symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1583definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1584where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1585symbol are listed.
252b5132 1586
4818e05f
AM
1587@cindex common allocation
1588@kindex --no-define-common
1589@item --no-define-common
1590This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1591The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1592@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1593
1594The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1595the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1596of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1597forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1598Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1599from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1600This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1601and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1602duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1603paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1604
7bdf4127
AB
1605@cindex group allocation in linker script
1606@cindex section groups
1607@cindex COMDAT
1608@kindex --force-group-allocation
1609@item --force-group-allocation
1610This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1611normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1612default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1613change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1614command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1615effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1616
252b5132 1617@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1618@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1619@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1620Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1621address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1622times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1623limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1624context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1625symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1626constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1627using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1628@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1629equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1630
1631@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1632@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1633@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1634@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1635@itemx --no-demangle
1636These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1637and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1638present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1639underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1640mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1641different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1642to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1643demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1644is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1645
1646@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1647@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1648@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1649@item -I@var{file}
1650@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1651Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1652generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1653linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1654doing.
1655
9b8b325a
RF
1656@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1657@item --no-dynamic-linker
1658When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1659linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1660executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1661entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1662
a70f34c0
NC
1663@kindex --embedded-relocs
1664@item --embedded-relocs
1665This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1666that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1667is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1668targets.
1669
3f0a5f17
ME
1670@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1671@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1672Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1673in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1674
7ce691ae 1675@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1676@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1677@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1678@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1679Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1680with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1681
252b5132
RH
1682@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1683@item --force-exe-suffix
1684Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1685
1686If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1687@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1688the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1689option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1690Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1691it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1692
1693@kindex --gc-sections
1694@kindex --no-gc-sections
1695@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1696@item --gc-sections
1697@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1698Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1699targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1700performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1701@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1702collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1703implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1704
d5465ba2
AM
1705@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1706examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1707symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1708command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1709referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1710libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1711referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1712the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1713relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1714@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1715
ac69cbc6 1716This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1717@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1718specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1719@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1720command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1721
c17d87de
NC
1722@kindex --print-gc-sections
1723@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1724@cindex garbage collection
1725@item --print-gc-sections
1726@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1727List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1728printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1729collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1730default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1731be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1732line.
1733
22185505 1734@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1735@cindex garbage collection
1736@item --gc-keep-exported
1737When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1738collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1739default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1740executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1741collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1742Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1743it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1744ELF format targets.
1745
30824704
RM
1746@kindex --print-output-format
1747@cindex output format
1748@item --print-output-format
1749Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1750other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1751in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1752
3604cb1f
TG
1753@kindex --print-memory-usage
1754@cindex memory usage
1755@item --print-memory-usage
1756Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1757the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1758quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1759headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1760parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1761
1762@smallexample
1763Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1764 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1765 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1766@end smallexample
1767
252b5132
RH
1768@cindex help
1769@cindex usage
1770@kindex --help
1771@item --help
1772Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1773
ea20a7da
CC
1774@kindex --target-help
1775@item --target-help
a094d01f 1776Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1777
2509a395
SL
1778@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1779@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1780Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
72a3b182
NC
1781@option{-M} option, above. Specifying a directory as @var{mapfile}
1782causes the linker map to be written into a file inside the directory.
1783The name of the file is based upon the @var{output} filename with
1784@code{.map} appended.
252b5132
RH
1785
1786@cindex memory usage
1787@kindex --no-keep-memory
1788@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1789@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1790symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1791instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1792necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1793while linking a large executable.
1794
1795@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1796@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1797@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1798@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1799@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1800Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1801is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1802The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1803behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1804libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1805
97a232d7
NC
1806The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1807
aa713662
L
1808@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1809@kindex -z muldefs
1810@item --allow-multiple-definition
1811@itemx -z muldefs
1812Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1813report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1814first definition will be used.
1815
b79e8c78 1816@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1817@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1818@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1819@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1820Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1821This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1822determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1823shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1824how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1825
903249d7
NC
1826The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1827referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1828an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1829a shared library.
1830
1831The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1832libraries specified at link time are that:
1833
1834@itemize @bullet
1835@item
1836A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1837that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1838resolvable at load time.
1839@item
1840There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1841symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1842
1843The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1844select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1845architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1846appropriate memset function.
1847@end itemize
b79e8c78 1848
31941635
L
1849@kindex --no-undefined-version
1850@item --no-undefined-version
1851Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1852it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1853will be issued instead.
1854
3e3b46e5
PB
1855@kindex --default-symver
1856@item --default-symver
1857Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1858exported symbols.
1859
1860@kindex --default-imported-symver
1861@item --default-imported-symver
1862Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1863imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1864
252b5132
RH
1865@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1866@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1867Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1868files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1869been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1870This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1871errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1872have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1873inappropriate.
1874
fe7929ce
AM
1875@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1876@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1877Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1878library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1879
252b5132
RH
1880@kindex --no-whole-archive
1881@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1882Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1883archive files.
1884
1885@cindex output file after errors
1886@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1887@item --noinhibit-exec
1888Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1889Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1890errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1891when it issues any error whatsoever.
1892
0a9c1c8e
CD
1893@kindex -nostdlib
1894@item -nostdlib
1895Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1896command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1897(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1898
252b5132 1899@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1900@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1901@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1902@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1903file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1904@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1905object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1906object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1907should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1908usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1909name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1910list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1911command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1912this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1913@end ifclear
1914
76359541
TP
1915@kindex --out-implib
1916@item --out-implib @var{file}
1917Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1918the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1919library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1920may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1921behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1922step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1923the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1924
36af4a4e
JJ
1925@kindex -pie
1926@kindex --pic-executable
1927@item -pie
1928@itemx --pic-executable
1929@cindex position independent executables
1930Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1931ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1932libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1933address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1934normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1935defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1936
252b5132
RH
1937@kindex -qmagic
1938@item -qmagic
1939This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1940
1941@kindex -Qy
1942@item -Qy
1943This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1944
1945@kindex --relax
1946@cindex synthesizing linker
1947@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1948@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1949@item --relax
28d5f677 1950@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1951An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1952@ifset GENERIC
1953This option is only supported on a few targets.
1954@end ifset
1955@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1956@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1957@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1958@ifset XTENSA
1959@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1960@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1961@ifset M68HC11
1962@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1963@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1964@ifset NIOSII
1965@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1966@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1967@ifset POWERPC
1968@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1969@end ifset
252b5132 1970
a094d01f 1971On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1972global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1973addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1974synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1975instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1976
1977On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1978debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1979@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1980This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1981family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1982@end ifset
1983
1984@ifset GENERIC
1985On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1986but ignored.
1987@end ifset
1988
28d5f677
NC
1989On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1990@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1991
252b5132
RH
1992@cindex retaining specified symbols
1993@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1994@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1995@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1996@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1997Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1998discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1999symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
2000@ifset GENERIC
2001(such as VxWorks)
2002@end ifset
2003where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
2004run-time memory.
2005
2006@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
2007or symbols needed for relocations.
2008
2009You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
2010line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
2011
2012@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 2013@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 2014@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 2015@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 2016Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 2017linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 2018arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
c1b00498
MR
2019them to locate shared objects at runtime.
2020
2021The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2022are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2023description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2024in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2025have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2026
2027If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2028contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2029is defined.
252b5132 2030
ff5dcc92 2031The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 2032SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
2033@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2034runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2035options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2036gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 2037file systems.
252b5132 2038
ff5dcc92 2039For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 2040followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 2041the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
2042@end ifset
2043
2044@ifset GENERIC
2045@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
2046@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2047@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
2048When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2049happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2050of the input files.
2051
2052When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2053non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2054shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 2055explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 2056specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 2057@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
2058either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2059appearing multiple times.
2060
e680a6b6
NC
2061The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2062directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2063containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2064and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
206564-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2066
2067The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2068@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2069supported.
2070
28c309a2
NC
2071This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2072that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2073is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2074runtime linker would do.
2075
252b5132 2076The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2077libraries:
d8e4137b 2078
252b5132
RH
2079@enumerate
2080@item
ff5dcc92 2081Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2082@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2083Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2084between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2085specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2086used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2087at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2088by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2089the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2090@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2091On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2092@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2093environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2094@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2095On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2096directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2097@item
a1b8d843 2098For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2099variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2100@item
ec4eb78a
L
2101For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2102@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2103libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2104@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2105@item
252b5132
RH
2106The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2107@item
d8e4137b
NC
2108For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2109exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2110to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2111defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2112configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2113@item
2114For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2115the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2116header file.
2117@item
2118Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2119linker script being used.
252b5132
RH
2120@end enumerate
2121
2122If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2123warning and continue with the link.
2124@end ifset
2125
2126@kindex -shared
2127@kindex -Bshareable
2128@item -shared
2129@itemx -Bshareable
2130@cindex shared libraries
2131Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2132and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2133shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2134undefined symbols in the link.
2135
252b5132 2136@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2137@item --sort-common
2138@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2139@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2140This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2141ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2142sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2143eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2144between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2145specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2146
2509a395
SL
2147@kindex --sort-section=name
2148@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2149This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2150patterns in the linker script.
2151
2509a395
SL
2152@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2153@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2154This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2155patterns in the linker script.
2156
a70f34c0
NC
2157@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2158@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2159This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2160.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2161post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2162
252b5132 2163@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2164@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2165Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2166each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2167size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2168
2169@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2170@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2171Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2172output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2173This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2174certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2175cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2176that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2177support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2178input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2179more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2180many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2181
2182@kindex --stats
2183@item --stats
2184Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2185as execution time and memory usage.
2186
2509a395 2187@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2188@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2189Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2190configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2191that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2192
a70f34c0
NC
2193@kindex --task-link
2194@item --task-link
2195This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2196file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2197
252b5132
RH
2198@kindex --traditional-format
2199@cindex traditional format
2200@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2201For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2202the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2203use the traditional format instead.
2204
2205@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2206For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2207symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2208full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2209@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2210trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2211combine duplicate entries.
2212
2509a395
SL
2213@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2214@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2215Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2216address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2217times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2218line.
2219@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2220for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2221@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2222should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2223sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2224
2509a395
SL
2225@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2226@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2227@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2228@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2229@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2230@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2231@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2232Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2233@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2234
2509a395
SL
2235@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2236@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2237@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2238When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2239byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2240
9d5777a3
RM
2241@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2242@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2243@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2244When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2245the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2246text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2247
0d705e9f
AM
2248@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2249@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2250@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2251When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2252model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2253
560e09e9
NC
2254@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2255@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2256Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2257values for @samp{method}:
2258
2259@table @samp
2260@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2261Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2262
2263@item report-all
da8bce14 2264Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2265
2266@item ignore-in-object-files
2267Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2268ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2269
2270@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2271Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2272ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2273when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2274libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2275command line.
2276@end table
2277
2278The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2279by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2280
2281Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2282unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2283can change this to a warning.
2284
1715a13c
L
2285@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2286@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2287@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2288@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2289Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2290supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2291the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2292argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2293
2294@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2295@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2296@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2297Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2298used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2299about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2300is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2301see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2302use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2303symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2304@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2305
7ce691ae 2306@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2307@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2308@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2309@item --warn-common
2310Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2311a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2312but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2313you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2314Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2315warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2316
2317There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2318
2319@table @samp
2320@item int i = 1;
2321A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2322file.
2323
2324@item extern int i;
2325An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2326There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2327variable somewhere.
2328
2329@item int i;
2330A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2331variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2332The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2333single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2334size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2335a definition of the same variable.
2336@end table
2337
2338The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2339Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2340just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2341encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2342a common symbol.
2343
2344@enumerate
2345@item
2346Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2347definition for the symbol.
2348@smallexample
2349@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2350 overridden by definition
2351@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2352@end smallexample
2353
2354@item
2355Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2356the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2357except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2358@smallexample
2359@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2360 overriding common
2361@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2362@end smallexample
2363
2364@item
2365Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2366@smallexample
2367@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2368 of `@var{symbol}'
2369@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2370@end smallexample
2371
2372@item
2373Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2374@smallexample
2375@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2376 overridden by larger common
2377@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2378@end smallexample
2379
2380@item
2381Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2382the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2383encountered in a different order.
2384@smallexample
2385@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2386 overriding smaller common
2387@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2388@end smallexample
2389@end enumerate
2390
2391@kindex --warn-constructors
2392@item --warn-constructors
2393Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2394object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2395detect the use of global constructors.
2396
2397@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2398@item --warn-multiple-gp
2399Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2400This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2401Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2402section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2403of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2404base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2405base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2406bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2407large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2408values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2409option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2410
2411@kindex --warn-once
2412@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2413@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2414@item --warn-once
2415Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2416which refers to it.
2417
2418@kindex --warn-section-align
2419@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2420@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2421@item --warn-section-align
2422Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2423alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2424The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2425is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2426the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2427
a6dbf402
L
2428@kindex --warn-textrel
2429@item --warn-textrel
2430Warn if the linker adds DT_TEXTREL to a position-independent executable
2431or shared object.
8fdd7217 2432
a0c402a5
L
2433@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2434@item --warn-alternate-em
2435Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2436
560e09e9
NC
2437@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2438@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2439If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2440@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2441This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2442
2443@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2444@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2445This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2446it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2447
252b5132
RH
2448@kindex --whole-archive
2449@cindex including an entire archive
2450@item --whole-archive
2451For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2452@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2453in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2454files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2455library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2456library. This option may be used more than once.
2457
7ec229ce 2458Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2459about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2460Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2461list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2462your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2463
2509a395
SL
2464@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2465@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2466Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2467@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2468undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2469@var{symbol}.
2470
2471This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2472wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2473wishes to call the system function, it should call
2474@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2475
2476Here is a trivial example:
2477
2478@smallexample
2479void *
cc2f008e 2480__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2481@{
cc2f008e 2482 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2483 return __real_malloc (c);
2484@}
2485@end smallexample
2486
ff5dcc92 2487If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2488all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2489instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2490call the real @code{malloc} function.
2491
2492You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2493links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2494you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2495file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2496call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2497
4ea904ed
SH
2498Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2499internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2500@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2501@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2502
2503@smallexample
2504int
2505f (void)
2506@{
2507 return 123;
2508@}
2509
2510int
2511g (void)
2512@{
2513 return f();
2514@}
2515@end smallexample
2516
6aa29e7b 2517@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2518@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2519@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2520@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2521Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2522(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2523section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2524
e41b3a13
JJ
2525@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2526@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2527Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2528generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2529if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2530
6c1439be
L
2531@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2532@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2533@item --enable-new-dtags
2534@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2535This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2536systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2537@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2538and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2539If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2540created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2541those options are only available for ELF systems.
2542
2d643429 2543@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2544@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2545Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2546close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2547time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2548increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2549value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2550
fdc90cb4
JJ
2551@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2552@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2553Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2554@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2555new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2556the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2557hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2558but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2559
0ce398f1
L
2560@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2561@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2562@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2563@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2564@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2565@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2566@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2567@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2568On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2569compressed using zlib.
2570
2571@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2572sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2573DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2574instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2575also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2576sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2577
2578The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2579@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2580
2581Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2582sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2583for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2584uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2585
2586The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2587involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2588default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2589@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2590
35835446
JR
2591@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2592@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2593This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2594linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2595for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2596about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2597
4f9c04f7 2598Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25991021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2600run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2601has been used.
2602
2603The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2604enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2605
c0065db7
RM
2606@kindex --build-id
2607@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2608@item --build-id
2609@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2610Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2611or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2612unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2613@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2614@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2615@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2616the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2617string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2618@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2619is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2620
2621The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2622that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2623unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2624to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2625file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2626string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2627
2628Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2629@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2630@end table
2631
0285c67d
NC
2632@c man end
2633
36f63dca 2634@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2635
0285c67d
NC
2636@c man begin OPTIONS
2637
ff5dcc92 2638The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2639the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2640normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2641use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2642@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2643like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2644symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2645object file).
2646
2647In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2648support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2649PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2650values by either a space or an equals sign.
2651
ff5dcc92 2652@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2653
2654@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2655@item --add-stdcall-alias
2656If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2657as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2658[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2659
2660@kindex --base-file
2661@item --base-file @var{file}
2662Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2663addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2664@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2665[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2666
2667@kindex --dll
2668@item --dll
2669Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2670@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2671file.
bb10df36 2672[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2673
88183869
DK
2674@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2675@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2676@item --enable-long-section-names
2677@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2678The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2679the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2680for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2681fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2682to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2683allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2684disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2685generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2686as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2687with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2688GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2689information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2690option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2691section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2692when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2693image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2694[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2695
252b5132
RH
2696@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2697@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2698@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2699@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2700If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2701do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2702only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2703resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2704undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2705@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2706to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2707warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2708import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2709to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2710feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2711@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2712mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2713[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2714
522f09cd
KT
2715@kindex --leading-underscore
2716@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2717@item --leading-underscore
2718@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2719For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2720in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2721disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2722
252b5132
RH
2723@cindex DLLs, creating
2724@kindex --export-all-symbols
2725@item --export-all-symbols
2726If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2727be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2728otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2729explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2730attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2731option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2732@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2733@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2734exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2735re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2736such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2737@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2738@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2739Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2740not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2741extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2742(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2743These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2744@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2745@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2746@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2747@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2748[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2749
2750@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2751@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2752Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2753exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2754[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2755
2927aaca
NC
2756@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2757@item --exclude-all-symbols
2758Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2759[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2760
252b5132
RH
2761@kindex --file-alignment
2762@item --file-alignment
2763Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2764file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2765512.
bb10df36 2766[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2767
2768@cindex heap size
2769@kindex --heap
2770@item --heap @var{reserve}
2771@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2772Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2773to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2774committed.
bb10df36 2775[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2776
2777@cindex image base
2778@kindex --image-base
2779@item --image-base @var{value}
2780Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2781the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2782is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2783your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2784other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2785for dlls.
bb10df36 2786[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2787
2788@kindex --kill-at
2789@item --kill-at
2790If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2791symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2792[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2793
26d2d8a2
BF
2794@kindex --large-address-aware
2795@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2796If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2797header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2798greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2799or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2800section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2801[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2802
f69a2f97
NC
2803@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2804@item --disable-large-address-aware
2805Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2806This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2807driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2808addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2809[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2810
252b5132
RH
2811@kindex --major-image-version
2812@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2813Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2814[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2815
2816@kindex --major-os-version
2817@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2818Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2819[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2820
2821@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2822@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2823Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2824[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2825
2826@kindex --minor-image-version
2827@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2828Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2829[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2830
2831@kindex --minor-os-version
2832@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2833Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2834[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2835
2836@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2837@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2838Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2839[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2840
2841@cindex DEF files, creating
2842@cindex DLLs, creating
2843@kindex --output-def
2844@item --output-def @var{file}
2845The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2846file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2847(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2848library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2849automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2850[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2851
b044cda1 2852@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2853@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2854@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2855@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2856Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2857@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2858By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2859for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2860execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2861[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2862
2863@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2864@item --disable-auto-image-base
2865Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2866user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2867default.
bb10df36 2868[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2869
2870@cindex DLLs, linking to
2871@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2872@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2873When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2874search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2875@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2876between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2877uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2878@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2879[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2880
2881@kindex --enable-auto-import
2882@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2883Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2884DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2885mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2886[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2887
2888The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2889feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2890
2891Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2892of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2893PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2894
e2a83dd0
NC
2895Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2896data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2897placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2898around a problem with consts that is described here:
2899http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2900
4d8907ac
DS
2901Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2902see this message:
0d888aac 2903
ece2d90e 2904"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2905documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2906
ece2d90e
NC
2907This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2908ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2909allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2910fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2911constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2912multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2913this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2914of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2915the warning, and exit.
2916
2917There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2918data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2919
2fa9fc65
NC
2920One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2921of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2922this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2923
c0065db7
RM
2924A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2925that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2926there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2927a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2928
2929@example
2930extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2931extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2932 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2933@end example
2934
2935or
2936
2937@example
2938extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2939extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2940 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2941@end example
2942
c0065db7 2943For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2944is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2945
2946@example
2947extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2948extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2949 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2950@end example
2951
c406afaf
NC
2952or
2953
2954@example
2955extern long long extern_ll;
2956extern_ll -->
2957 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2958@end example
2959
2fa9fc65 2960A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2961'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2962@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2963requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2964building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2965merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2966between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2967constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2968
2969Original:
2970@example
2971--foo.h
2972extern int arr[];
2973--foo.c
2974#include "foo.h"
2975void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2976 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2977@}
2978@end example
2979
2980Solution 1:
2981@example
2982--foo.h
2983extern int arr[];
2984--foo.c
2985#include "foo.h"
2986void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2987 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2988 volatile int *parr = arr;
2989 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2990@}
2991@end example
2992
2993Solution 2:
2994@example
2995--foo.h
2996/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2997#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2998 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2999#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
3000#else
3001#define FOO_IMPORT
3002#endif
3003extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
3004--foo.c
3005#include "foo.h"
3006void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
3007 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
3008@}
3009@end example
3010
c0065db7 3011A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
3012library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
3013for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
3014functions).
b044cda1
CW
3015
3016@kindex --disable-auto-import
3017@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 3018Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 3019@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 3020[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 3021
2fa9fc65
NC
3022@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3023@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3024If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3025that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3026a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 3027environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 3028[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
3029
3030@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3031@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 3032Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 3033[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 3034
b044cda1
CW
3035@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3036@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3037Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 3038[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 3039
252b5132
RH
3040@kindex --section-alignment
3041@item --section-alignment
3042Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3043addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 3044[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3045
3046@cindex stack size
3047@kindex --stack
3048@item --stack @var{reserve}
3049@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 3050Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 3051to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 3052committed.
bb10df36 3053[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3054
3055@kindex --subsystem
3056@item --subsystem @var{which}
3057@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3058@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3059Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3060legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
3061@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3062the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3063@var{which}.
bb10df36 3064[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 3065
2f563b51
DK
3066The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3067of the PE file header:
3068[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3069
2d5c3743
NC
3070@kindex --high-entropy-va
3071@item --high-entropy-va
3072Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3073(ASLR).
dc9bd8c9
HD
3074This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3075@option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2d5c3743 3076
2f563b51
DK
3077@kindex --dynamicbase
3078@item --dynamicbase
3079The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3080randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3081Vista for i386 PE targets.
dc9bd8c9 3082This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2f563b51
DK
3083
3084@kindex --forceinteg
3085@item --forceinteg
3086Code integrity checks are enforced.
3087
3088@kindex --nxcompat
3089@item --nxcompat
3090The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3091This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3092
3093@kindex --no-isolation
3094@item --no-isolation
3095Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3096
3097@kindex --no-seh
3098@item --no-seh
3099The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3100this image.
3101
3102@kindex --no-bind
3103@item --no-bind
3104Do not bind this image.
3105
3106@kindex --wdmdriver
3107@item --wdmdriver
3108The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3109
2f563b51
DK
3110@kindex --tsaware
3111@item --tsaware
3112The image is Terminal Server aware.
3113
0cb112f7
CF
3114@kindex --insert-timestamp
3115@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3116@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3117Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3118as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3119other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3120will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3121same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3122can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3123that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3124identically.
dc9bd8c9
HD
3125
3126@kindex --enable-reloc-section
3127@item --enable-reloc-section
3128Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3129is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
252b5132
RH
3130@end table
3131
0285c67d
NC
3132@c man end
3133
ac145307
BS
3134@ifset C6X
3135@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3136
3137@c man begin OPTIONS
3138
3139The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3140libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3141all executables use an index of 0.
3142
3143@table @gcctabopt
3144
3145@kindex --dsbt-size
3146@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3147This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3148or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3149entries.
3150
3151@kindex --dsbt-index
3152@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3153This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3154to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3155executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3156@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3157
fbd9ad90
PB
3158@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3159The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3160exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3161
ac145307
BS
3162@end table
3163
3164@c man end
3165@end ifset
3166
b8891f8d
AJ
3167@ifset CSKY
3168@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3169
3170@c man begin OPTIONS
3171
3172@table @gcctabopt
3173
3174@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3175@item --branch-stub
3176This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3177sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3178usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3179can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3180the compiler or assembler.
3181
3182@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3183@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3184This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3185It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3186be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3187stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3188sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3189@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3190linker should choose suitable defaults.
3191
3192@end table
3193
3194@c man end
3195@end ifset
3196
93fd0973
SC
3197@ifset M68HC11
3198@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3199
3200@c man begin OPTIONS
3201
3202The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3203memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3204
3205@table @gcctabopt
3206
3207@kindex --no-trampoline
3208@item --no-trampoline
3209This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3210is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3211instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3212
3213@kindex --bank-window
3214@item --bank-window @var{name}
3215This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3216the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3217The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3218paging and addresses within the memory window.
3219
3220@end table
3221
3222@c man end
3223@end ifset
3224
7fb9f789
NC
3225@ifset M68K
3226@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3227
3228@c man begin OPTIONS
3229
3230The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3231when linking for 68K targets.
3232
3233@table @gcctabopt
3234
3235@kindex --got
3236@item --got=@var{type}
3237This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3238@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3239@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3240Info entry for @file{ld}.
3241
3242@end table
3243
3244@c man end
3245@end ifset
3246
833794fc
MR
3247@ifset MIPS
3248@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3249
3250@c man begin OPTIONS
3251
3252The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3253generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3254linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3255
3256@table @gcctabopt
3257
3258@kindex --insn32
3259@item --insn32
3260@kindex --no-insn32
3261@itemx --no-insn32
3262These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3263generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3264or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
326532-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3266used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3267possible.
3268
8b10b0b3
MR
3269@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3270@item --ignore-branch-isa
3271@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3272@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3273These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3274transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3275accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3276is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3277instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3278equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3279calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3280a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3281an error.
3282
3734320d
MF
3283@kindex --compact-branches
3284@item --compact-branches
3285@kindex --no-compact-branches
fa1477dc 3286@itemx --no-compact-branches
3734320d
MF
3287These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3288in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3289
833794fc
MR
3290@end table
3291
3292@c man end
3293@end ifset
3294
fa1477dc
SC
3295
3296@ifset PDP11
3297@subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
3298
3299@c man begin OPTIONS
3300
3301For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
3302produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
3303for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
3304targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
3305defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
3306here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
3307
3308@table @gcctabopt
3309
3310@kindex -N
3311@item -N
3312@kindex --omagic
3313@itemx --omagic
3314
3315Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
3316indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
3317shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
3318writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
3319the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
3320programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
3321from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
3322
3323@kindex -n
3324@item -n
3325@kindex --nmagic
3326@itemx --nmagic
3327
3328Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
3329indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
3330be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
3331file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
3332byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
3333a @emph{pure executable} format.
3334
3335@kindex -z
3336@item -z
3337@kindex --imagic
3338@itemx --imagic
3339
3340Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
3341indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
3342data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
3343instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
3344larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
3345to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
3346shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
3347option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
3348and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
3349this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
3350executable} format.
3351
3352@kindex --no-omagic
3353@item --no-omagic
3354
3355Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
3356
3357@end table
3358
3359@c man end
3360@end ifset
3361
252b5132
RH
3362@ifset UsesEnvVars
3363@node Environment
3364@section Environment Variables
3365
0285c67d
NC
3366@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3367
560e09e9 3368You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3369@ifclear SingleFormat
3370@code{GNUTARGET},
3371@end ifclear
3372@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3373
36f63dca 3374@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3375@kindex GNUTARGET
3376@cindex default input format
3377@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3378use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3379of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3380@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3381of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3382attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3383this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3384there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3385object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3386BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3387in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3388@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3389
3390@kindex LDEMULATION
3391@cindex default emulation
3392@cindex emulation, default
3393@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3394@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3395behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3396available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3397the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3398variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3399linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3400
3401@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3402@cindex demangling, default
3403Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3404@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3405default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3406a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3407may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3408options.
3409
0285c67d
NC
3410@c man end
3411@end ifset
3412
252b5132
RH
3413@node Scripts
3414@chapter Linker Scripts
3415
3416@cindex scripts
3417@cindex linker scripts
3418@cindex command files
3419Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3420written in the linker command language.
3421
3422The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3423the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3424the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3425more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3426direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3427described below.
3428
3429The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3430yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3431linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3432to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3433such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3434
3435You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3436line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3437default linker script.
3438
3439You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3440to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3441Linker Scripts}.
3442
3443@menu
3444* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3445* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3446* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3447* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3448* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3449* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3450* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3451* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3452* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3453* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3454* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3455@end menu
3456
3457@node Basic Script Concepts
3458@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3459@cindex linker script concepts
3460We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3461describe the linker script language.
3462
3463The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3464file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3465@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3466The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3467purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3468among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3469section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3470in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3471
3472Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3473also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3474contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3475the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3476A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3477area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3478loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3479which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3480of debugging information.
3481
3482Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3483first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3484the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3485@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3486section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3487same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3488is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3489(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3490based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3491RAM address would be the VMA.
3492
3493You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3494program with the @samp{-h} option.
3495
3496Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3497@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3498has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3499information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3500will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3501static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3502referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3503
3504You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3505program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3506option.
3507
3508@node Script Format
3509@section Linker Script Format
3510@cindex linker script format
3511Linker scripts are text files.
3512
3513You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3514either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3515symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3516generally ignored.
3517
3518Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3519If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3520otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3521double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3522file name.
3523
3524You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3525@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3526to whitespace.
3527
3528@node Simple Example
3529@section Simple Linker Script Example
3530@cindex linker script example
3531@cindex example of linker script
3532Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3533
3534The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3535@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3536memory layout of the output file.
3537
3538The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3539describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3540code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3541@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3542Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3543your input files.
3544
3545For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
35460x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3547linker script which will do that:
3548@smallexample
3549SECTIONS
3550@{
3551 . = 0x10000;
3552 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3553 . = 0x8000000;
3554 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3555 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3556@}
3557@end smallexample
3558
3559You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3560followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3561descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3562
252b5132
RH
3563The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3564sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3565counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3566other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3567current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3568incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3569@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3570
3571The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3572required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3573after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3574which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3575wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3576means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3577
3578Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3579@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3580@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3581
3582The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3583the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3584at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3585output section, the value of the location counter will be
3586@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3587effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3588immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3589
3590The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3591alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3592example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3593sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3594may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3595sections.
3596
3597That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3598
3599@node Simple Commands
3600@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3601@cindex linker script simple commands
3602In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3603
3604@menu
3605* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3606* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3607@ifclear SingleFormat
3608* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3609@end ifclear
3610
4a93e180 3611* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3612* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3613@end menu
3614
3615@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3616@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3617@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3618@cindex start of execution
3619@cindex first instruction
3620@cindex entry point
3621The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3622point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3623entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3624@smallexample
3625ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3626@end smallexample
3627
3628There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3629entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3630stopping when one of them succeeds:
3631@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3632@item
252b5132 3633the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3634@item
252b5132 3635the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3636@item
a094d01f 3637the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3638targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3639check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3640@item
252b5132 3641the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3642@item
252b5132
RH
3643The address @code{0}.
3644@end itemize
3645
3646@node File Commands
36f63dca 3647@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3648@cindex linker script file commands
3649Several linker script commands deal with files.
3650
3651@table @code
3652@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3653@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3654@cindex including a linker script
3655Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3656be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3657with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
365810 levels deep.
3659
4006703d
NS
3660You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3661@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3662
252b5132
RH
3663@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3664@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3665@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3666@cindex input files in linker scripts
3667@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3668@cindex linker script input object files
3669The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3670in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3671
3672For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3673a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3674then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3675
3676In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3677script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3678
e3f2db7f
AO
3679In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3680with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3681located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
16171946
FS
3682for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying
3683@code{=} as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the
3684filename path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of
3685@samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3686
3687If a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is not used then the linker will try to open
3688the file in the directory containing the linker script. If it is not
3689found the linker will then search the current directory. If it is still
3690not found the linker will search through the archive library search
3691path.
252b5132 3692
ff5dcc92 3693If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3694name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3695@samp{-l}.
3696
3697When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3698files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3699script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3700
3701@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3702@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3703@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3704@cindex grouping input files
3705The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3706files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3707new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3708in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3709
b717d30e
JJ
3710@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3711@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3712@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3713This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3714commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3715as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3716with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3717when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3718@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3719and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3720setting afterwards.
3721
252b5132
RH
3722@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3723@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3724@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3725The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3726@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3727@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3728Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3729precedence.
3730
3731You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3732output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3733
3734@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3735@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3736@cindex library search path in linker script
3737@cindex archive search path in linker script
3738@cindex search path in linker script
3739The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3740@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3741@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3742on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3743are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3744the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3745
3746@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3747@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3748@cindex first input file
3749The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3750that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3751though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3752when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3753first file.
3754@end table
3755
3756@ifclear SingleFormat
3757@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3758@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3759A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3760
3761@table @code
3762@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3763@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3764@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3765@cindex output file format in linker script
3766The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3767output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3768exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3769(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3770line option takes precedence.
3771
3772You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3773formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3774This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3775desired endianness.
3776
3777If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3778will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3779output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3780used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3781
3782For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3783command:
3784@smallexample
3785OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3786@end smallexample
3787This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3788@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3789option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3790format.
3791
3792@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3793@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3794@cindex input file format in linker script
3795The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3796files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3797This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3798(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3799is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3800command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3801@end table
3802@end ifclear
3803
4a93e180
NC
3804@node REGION_ALIAS
3805@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3806@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3807@cindex region alias
3808@cindex region names
3809
3810Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3811@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3812
3813@smallexample
3814REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3815@end smallexample
3816
3817The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3818memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3819to memory regions. An example follows.
3820
3821Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3822memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3823that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3824non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3825access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3826read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3827sections:
3828
3829@itemize @bullet
3830@item
3831@code{.text} program code;
3832@item
3833@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3834@item
3835@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3836@item
3837@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3838@end itemize
3839
3840The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3841part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3842output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3843systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3844@code{C}:
3845@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3846@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3847@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3848@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3849@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3850@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3851@end multitable
3852The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3853loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3854the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3855the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3856
3857The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3858includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3859memory layout:
3860@smallexample
3861INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3862
3863SECTIONS
3864 @{
3865 .text :
3866 @{
3867 *(.text)
3868 @} > REGION_TEXT
3869 .rodata :
3870 @{
3871 *(.rodata)
3872 rodata_end = .;
3873 @} > REGION_RODATA
3874 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3875 @{
3876 data_start = .;
3877 *(.data)
3878 @} > REGION_DATA
3879 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3880 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3881 .bss :
3882 @{
3883 *(.bss)
3884 @} > REGION_BSS
3885 @}
3886@end smallexample
3887
3888Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3889regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3890variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3891@table @code
3892@item A
3893Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3894@smallexample
3895MEMORY
3896 @{
3897 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3898 @}
3899
3900REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3901REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3902REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3903REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3904@end smallexample
3905@item B
3906Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3907into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3908@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3909@smallexample
3910MEMORY
3911 @{
3912 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3913 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3914 @}
3915
3916REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3917REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3918REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3919REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3920@end smallexample
3921@item C
3922Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3923@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3924initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3925system start into the @code{RAM}.
3926@smallexample
3927MEMORY
3928 @{
3929 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3930 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3931 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3932 @}
3933
3934REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3935REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3936REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3937REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3938@end smallexample
3939@end table
3940
3941It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3942@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3943necessary:
3944@smallexample
3945#include <string.h>
3946
3947extern char data_start [];
3948extern char data_size [];
3949extern char data_load_start [];
3950
3951void copy_data(void)
3952@{
3953 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3954 @{
3955 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3956 @}
3957@}
3958@end smallexample
3959
252b5132 3960@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3961@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3962There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3963
3964@table @code
3965@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3966@kindex ASSERT
3967@cindex assertion in linker script
3968Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3969with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3970
fd1c4238
NC
3971Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3972take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3973inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3974for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3975symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3976
3977@smallexample
3978 .stack :
3979 @{
3980 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3981 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3982 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3983 @}
3984@end smallexample
3985
3986will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3987PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3988can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3989
3990@smallexample
3991 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3992 .stack :
3993 @{
3994 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3995 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3996 @}
3997@end smallexample
3998
3999will work.
4000
252b5132
RH
4001@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
4002@kindex EXTERN
4003@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
4004Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
4005symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
4006modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
4007each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
4008command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
4009
4010@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4011@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4012@cindex common allocation in linker script
4013This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 4014to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
4015output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
4016
4818e05f
AM
4017@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4018@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4019@cindex common allocation in linker script
4020This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
4021command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
4022to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
4023
7bdf4127
AB
4024@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4025@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4026@cindex group allocation in linker script
4027@cindex section groups
4028@cindex COMDAT
4029This command has the same effect as the
4030@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
4031@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
4032and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
4033specified (@samp{-r}).
4034
53d25da6
AM
4035@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
4036@kindex INSERT
4037@cindex insert user script into default script
4038This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
4039augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
4040inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
4041@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
4042default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
4043sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
4044linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
4045insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
4046linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
4047default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
4048of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
4049to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
4050is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
4051
4052@smallexample
4053SECTIONS
4054@{
4055 OVERLAY :
4056 @{
4057 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
4058 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
4059 @}
4060@}
4061INSERT AFTER .text;
4062@end smallexample
4063
252b5132
RH
4064@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
4065@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
4066@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 4067This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
4068references among certain output sections.
4069
4070In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
4071using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
4072will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
4073errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
4074a function defined in the other section.
4075
4076The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 4077@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
4078an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
4079@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
4080names.
4081
cdf96953
MF
4082@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
4083@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
4084@cindex cross references
4085This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4086references to one section from a list of other sections.
4087
4088The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
4089output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
4090a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
4091there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
4092must never call back.
4093
4094The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4095The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4096If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4097the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4098status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4099names, not input section names.
4100
252b5132
RH
4101@ifclear SingleFormat
4102@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4103@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4104@cindex machine architecture
4105@cindex architecture
4106Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4107of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4108architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4109the @samp{-f} option.
4110@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
4111
4112@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4113@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4114This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4115@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4116in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4117@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
4118@end table
4119
4120@node Assignments
4121@section Assigning Values to Symbols
4122@cindex assignment in scripts
4123@cindex symbol definition, scripts
4124@cindex variables, defining
4125You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 4126the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
4127
4128@menu
4129* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 4130* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 4131* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 4132* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 4133* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
4134@end menu
4135
4136@node Simple Assignments
4137@subsection Simple Assignments
4138
4139You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4140
4141@table @code
4142@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4143@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4144@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4145@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4146@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4147@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4148@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4149@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4150@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4151@end table
4152
4153The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4154@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4155defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4156
4157The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4158may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4159
4160The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4161
4162Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4163
4164You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4165statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4166section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4167
4168The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4169expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4170
4171Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4172assignments may be used:
4173
4174@smallexample
4175floating_point = 0;
4176SECTIONS
4177@{
4178 .text :
4179 @{
4180 *(.text)
4181 _etext = .;
4182 @}
156e34dd 4183 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4184 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4185@}
4186@end smallexample
4187@noindent
4188In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4189zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4190the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4191defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4192upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4193
eb8476a6
MR
4194@node HIDDEN
4195@subsection HIDDEN
4196@cindex HIDDEN
4197For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4198exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4199
4200Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4201@code{HIDDEN}:
4202
4203@smallexample
4204HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4205SECTIONS
4206@{
4207 .text :
4208 @{
4209 *(.text)
4210 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4211 @}
4212 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4213 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4214@}
4215@end smallexample
4216@noindent
4217In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4218
252b5132
RH
4219@node PROVIDE
4220@subsection PROVIDE
4221@cindex PROVIDE
4222In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4223only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4224the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4225@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4226@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4227@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4228@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4229@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4230
4231Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4232@smallexample
4233SECTIONS
4234@{
4235 .text :
4236 @{
4237 *(.text)
4238 _etext = .;
4239 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4240 @}
4241@}
4242@end smallexample
4243
4244In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4245underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4246the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4247underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4248If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4249linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4250
b0daac83
NC
4251Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4252defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4253that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4254when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4255@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4256
7af8e998
L
4257@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4258@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4259@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4260Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4261hidden and won't be exported.
4262
73ae6183
NC
4263@node Source Code Reference
4264@subsection Source Code Reference
4265
4266Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4267intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4268a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4269symbol that does not have a value.
4270
4271Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4272transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4273stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4274prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4275mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4276of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4277variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4278linker script variable might be referred to as:
4279
4280@smallexample
4281 extern int foo;
4282@end smallexample
4283
4284But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4285
4286@smallexample
4287 _foo = 1000;
4288@end smallexample
4289
4290In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4291transformation has taken place.
4292
4293When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4294things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4295in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4296second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4297table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4298contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4299value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4300
4301@smallexample
4302 int foo = 1000;
4303@end smallexample
4304
10bf6894 4305creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4306holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4307number 1000 is initially stored.
4308
4309When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4310first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4311memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4312So:
4313
4314@smallexample
4315 foo = 1;
4316@end smallexample
4317
4318looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4319associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4320address. Whereas:
4321
4322@smallexample
4323 int * a = & foo;
4324@end smallexample
4325
10bf6894 4326looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4327and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4328the variable @samp{a}.
4329
4330Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4331the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4332an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4333
4334@smallexample
4335 foo = 1000;
4336@end smallexample
4337
4338creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4339the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4340address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4341linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4342access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4343
4344Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4345you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4346use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4347section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4348linker script contains these declarations:
4349
4350@smallexample
4351@group
4352 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4353 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4354 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4355@end group
4356@end smallexample
4357
4358Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4359
4360@smallexample
4361@group
4362 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4363
73ae6183
NC
4364 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4365@end group
4366@end smallexample
4367
4368Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4369Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4370arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4371
4372@smallexample
4373@group
4374 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4375
4376 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4377@end group
4378@end smallexample
4379
4380Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4381operators.
73ae6183 4382
252b5132 4383@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4384@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4385@kindex SECTIONS
4386The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4387into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4388
4389The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4390@smallexample
4391SECTIONS
4392@{
4393 @var{sections-command}
4394 @var{sections-command}
4395 @dots{}
4396@}
4397@end smallexample
4398
4399Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4400
4401@itemize @bullet
4402@item
4403an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4404@item
4405a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4406@item
4407an output section description
4408@item
4409an overlay description
4410@end itemize
4411
4412The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4413@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4414those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4415understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4416the layout of the output file.
4417
4418Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4419below.
4420
4421If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4422linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4423section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4424input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4425example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4426in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4427
4428@menu
4429* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4430* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4431* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4432* Input Section:: Input section description
4433* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4434* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4435* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4436* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4437* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4438@end menu
4439
4440@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4441@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4442The full description of an output section looks like this:
4443@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4444@group
7e7d5768 4445@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4446 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4447 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4448 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4449 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4450 @{
4451 @var{output-section-command}
4452 @var{output-section-command}
4453 @dots{}
abc9061b 4454 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4455@end group
4456@end smallexample
4457
4458Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4459
4460The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4461name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4462The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4463the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4464The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4465
4466Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4467
4468@itemize @bullet
4469@item
4470a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4471@item
4472an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4473@item
4474data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4475@item
4476a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4477@end itemize
4478
4479@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4480@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4481@cindex name, section
4482@cindex section name
4483The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4484meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4485support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4486must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4487example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4488output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4489names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4490quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4491characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4492commas must be quoted.
4493
4494The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4495Discarding}.
4496
4497@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4498@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4499@cindex address, section
4500@cindex section address
4501The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4502address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4503is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4504
4505If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4506section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4507to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4508alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4509contained within the output section.
4510
4511The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4512
4513@itemize @bullet
4514@item
4515If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4516is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4517in that region.
4518
4519@item
4520If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4521regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4522section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4523be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4524
4525@item
4526If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4527the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4528counter.
4529@end itemize
4530
4531@noindent
4532For example:
4533
252b5132
RH
4534@smallexample
4535.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4536@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4537
252b5132
RH
4538@noindent
4539and
ea5cae92 4540
252b5132
RH
4541@smallexample
4542.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4543@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4544
252b5132
RH
4545@noindent
4546are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4547@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4548counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4549counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4550input sections.
252b5132
RH
4551
4552The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4553For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4554so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4555do something like this:
4556@smallexample
4557.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4558@end smallexample
4559@noindent
4560This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4561aligned upward to the specified value.
4562
4563Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4564location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4565sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4566
4567@node Input Section
36f63dca 4568@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4569@cindex input sections
4570@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4571The most common output section command is an input section description.
4572
4573The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4574You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4575in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4576map the input files into your memory layout.
4577
4578@menu
4579* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4580* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4581* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4582* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4583* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4584@end menu
4585
4586@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4587@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4588@cindex input section basics
4589An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4590by a list of section names in parentheses.
4591
4592The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4593describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4594
4595The most common input section description is to include all input
4596sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4597include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4598@smallexample
4599*(.text)
4600@end smallexample
4601@noindent
18625d54 4602Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4603@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4604of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4605match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4606example:
252b5132 4607@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4608EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4609@end smallexample
4610@noindent
4611will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4612and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4613placed inside the section list, for example:
4614@smallexample
b4346c09 4615*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4616@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4617@noindent
4618The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4619two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4620more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4621
4622There are two ways to include more than one section:
4623@smallexample
4624*(.text .rdata)
4625*(.text) *(.rdata)
4626@end smallexample
4627@noindent
4628The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4629@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4630first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4631they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4632@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4633@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4634
8f1732fc
AB
4635When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4636is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4637immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4638@smallexample
4639*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4640@end smallexample
4641@noindent
4642will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4643@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4644from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4645exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4646could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4647@smallexample
4648*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4649@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4650@noindent
4651Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4652before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4653all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4654@smallexample
4655EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4656@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4657
252b5132
RH
4658You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4659You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4660needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4661@smallexample
4662data.o(.data)
4663@end smallexample
4664
ae17ab41
CM
4665To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4666of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4667
4668Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4669
4670@smallexample
4671@group
4672SECTIONS @{
4673 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4674 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4675@}
4676@end group
4677@end smallexample
4678
4679In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4680input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4681@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4682@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4683whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4684
967928e9
AM
4685You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4686matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4687with no whitespace around the colon.
4688
4689@table @samp
4690@item archive:file
4691matches file within archive
4692@item archive:
4693matches the whole archive
4694@item :file
4695matches file but not one in an archive
4696@end table
4697
4698Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4699wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4700single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4701@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4702within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4703also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4704other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4705from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4706command.
4707
252b5132
RH
4708If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4709the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4710commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4711@smallexample
4712data.o
4713@end smallexample
4714
967928e9
AM
4715When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4716and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4717characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4718name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4719did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4720though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4721@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4722the archive search path.
4723
4724@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4725@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4726@cindex input section wildcards
4727@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4728@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4729@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4730In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4731name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4732
4733The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4734pattern for the file name.
4735
4736The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4737
4738@table @samp
4739@item *
4740matches any number of characters
4741@item ?
4742matches any single character
4743@item [@var{chars}]
4744matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4745character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4746@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4747@item \
4748quotes the following character
4749@end table
4750
4751When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4752will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4753Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4754exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4755@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4756a @samp{/} character.
4757
4758File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4759specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4760does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4761
4762If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4763appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4764will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4765sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4766@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4767@smallexample
4768.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4769.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4770@end smallexample
4771
bcaa7b3e 4772@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4773Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4774in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4775this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4776pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4777@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4778into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4779
bcaa7b3e 4780@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
9a24a276
AM
4781@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4782@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4783alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4784alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4785needed.
bcaa7b3e 4786
02ecc8e9 4787@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
9a24a276
AM
4788@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4789@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4790numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4791section name before placing them in the output file. In
4792@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4793the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4794@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
02ecc8e9 4795
bcaa7b3e
L
4796@cindex SORT
4797@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4798
4799When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4800can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4801
4802@enumerate
4803@item
4804@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4805It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4806sections have the same name.
4807@item
4808@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4809It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4810sections have the same alignment.
4811@item
c0065db7 4812@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4813treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4814@item
4815@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4816is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4817@item
4818All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4819@end enumerate
4820
a05a5b64 4821When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4822section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4823takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4824
4825If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4826command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4827treated as nested sorting command.
4828
4829@enumerate
4830@item
4831@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4832@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4833@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4834@item
4835@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4836@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4837@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4838@end enumerate
4839
4840If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4841command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4842
eda680f8 4843@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4844@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4845section sorting option.
4846
252b5132
RH
4847If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4848@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4849precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4850
4851This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4852files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4853sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4854The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4855with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4856linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4857@smallexample
4858@group
4859SECTIONS @{
4860 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4861 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4862 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4863 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4864@}
4865@end group
4866@end smallexample
4867
4868@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4869@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4870@cindex common symbol placement
4871@cindex uninitialized data placement
4872A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4873file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4874linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4875named @samp{COMMON}.
4876
4877You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4878other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4879particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4880input files are placed in another section.
4881
4882In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4883@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4884@smallexample
4885.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4886@end smallexample
4887
4888@cindex scommon section
4889@cindex small common symbols
4890Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4891example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4892symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4893different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4894the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4895symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4896to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4897locations.
4898
4899@cindex [COMMON]
4900You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4901notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4902@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4903
4904@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4905@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4906@cindex KEEP
4907@cindex garbage collection
4908When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4909it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4910This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4911with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4912@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4913
4914@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4915@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4916The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4917to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4918start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4919@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4920follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4921@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4922@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4923All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4924files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4925
4926@smallexample
4927@group
4928SECTIONS @{
4929 outputa 0x10000 :
4930 @{
4931 all.o
4932 foo.o (.input1)
4933 @}
36f63dca
NC
4934@end group
4935@group
252b5132
RH
4936 outputb :
4937 @{
4938 foo.o (.input2)
4939 foo1.o (.input1)
4940 @}
36f63dca
NC
4941@end group
4942@group
252b5132
RH
4943 outputc :
4944 @{
4945 *(.input1)
4946 *(.input2)
4947 @}
4948@}
4949@end group
a1ab1d2a 4950@end smallexample
252b5132 4951
cbd0eecf
L
4952If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4953and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4954automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4955__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4956indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4957respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4958C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4959
252b5132 4960@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4961@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4962@cindex data
4963@cindex section data
4964@cindex output section data
4965@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4966@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4967@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4968@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4969@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4970You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4971@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4972an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4973parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4974value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4975counter.
4976
4977The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4978store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4979bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4980stored.
4981
4982For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4983of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4984@smallexample
4985BYTE(1)
4986LONG(addr)
4987@end smallexample
4988
4989When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4990same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4991target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4992@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4993@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4994
4995If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4996which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4997When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4998true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4999endianness of the first input object file.
5000
36f63dca 5001Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
5002between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
5003@smallexample
5004SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
5005@end smallexample
5006whereas this will work:
5007@smallexample
5008SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
5009@end smallexample
5010
252b5132
RH
5011@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
5012@cindex holes, filling
5013@cindex unspecified memory
5014You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
5015current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
5016otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
5017gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 5018with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
5019necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
5020point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
5021than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
5022different parts of an output section.
5023
5024This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 5025value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 5026@smallexample
563e308f 5027FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
5028@end smallexample
5029
5030The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 5031section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
5032part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
5033entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 5034precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 5035expression.
252b5132
RH
5036
5037@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 5038@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
5039There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
5040commands.
5041
5042@table @code
5043@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5044@cindex input filename symbols
5045@cindex filename symbols
5046@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5047The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
5048The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
5049file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
5050the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
5051
5052This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
5053normally used for any other object file format.
5054
5055@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
5056@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
5057@cindex constructors, arranging in link
5058@item CONSTRUCTORS
5059When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
5060unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
5061destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
5062arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
5063automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
5064For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
5065linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
5066@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
5067ignored for other object file formats.
5068
5069The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
5070constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
5071Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
5072the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
5073first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
5074of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
5075compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
5076formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
5077@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
5078the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
5079destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
5080@code{exit}.
5081
5082For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
5083arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
5084addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
5085and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
5086linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
5087runtime code expects to see.
5088
5089@smallexample
5090 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
5091 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5092 *(.ctors)
5093 LONG(0)
5094 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5095 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5096 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5097 *(.dtors)
5098 LONG(0)
5099 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5100@end smallexample
5101
5102If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5103which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5104are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5105are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
5106command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5107@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5108@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
5109@samp{*(.dtors)}.
5110
5111Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5112and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5113need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5114scripts.
5115
5116@end table
5117
5118@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 5119@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
5120@cindex discarding sections
5121@cindex sections, discarding
5122@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
5123The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5124This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5125may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 5126@smallexample
49c13adb 5127.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
5128@end smallexample
5129@noindent
5130will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
5131@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5132sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
5133space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5134too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5135space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5136@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5137@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5138This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 5139
a0976ea4 5140The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
5141on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5142symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
5143the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5144section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
5145
5146@cindex /DISCARD/
5147The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5148input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5149section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5150
a2e098c3
NC
5151Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5152discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5153members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5154Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5155
252b5132 5156@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 5157@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
5158@cindex output section attributes
5159We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5160like this:
0c71d759 5161
252b5132 5162@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5163@group
7e7d5768 5164@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5165 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5166 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5167 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5168 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5169 @{
5170 @var{output-section-command}
5171 @var{output-section-command}
5172 @dots{}
562d3460 5173 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5174@end group
5175@end smallexample
0c71d759 5176
252b5132
RH
5177We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5178@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5179remaining section attributes.
5180
a1ab1d2a 5181@menu
252b5132
RH
5182* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5183* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5184* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5185* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5186* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5187* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5188* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5189* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5190@end menu
5191
5192@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5193@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5194Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5195parentheses. The following types are defined:
5196
5197@table @code
5198@item NOLOAD
5199The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5200loaded into memory when the program is run.
5201@item DSECT
5202@itemx COPY
5203@itemx INFO
5204@itemx OVERLAY
5205These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5206rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5207marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5208section when the program is run.
5209@end table
5210
5211@kindex NOLOAD
5212@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5213@cindex loading, preventing
5214The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5215the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5216the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5217@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5218need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5219@smallexample
5220@group
5221SECTIONS @{
5222 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5223 @dots{}
5224@}
5225@end group
5226@end smallexample
5227
5228@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5229@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5230@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5231@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5232@cindex load address
5233@cindex section load address
5234Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5235@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5236@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5237specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5238address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5239
ea5cae92
NC
5240The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5241specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5242takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5243load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5244region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5245
5246If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5247section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5248load address:
5249
5250@itemize @bullet
5251@item
5252If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5253the LMA address as well.
5254
5255@item
5256If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5257
5258@item
5259Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5260with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5261section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5262VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5263the last section in the located region.
5264
5265@item
5266If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5267that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5268
5269@item
5270If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5271section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5272@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5273
5274@cindex ROM initialized data
5275@cindex initialized data in ROM
5276This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5277example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5278called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5279@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5280even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5281uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5282defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5283counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5284
5285@smallexample
5286@group
5287SECTIONS
5288 @{
5289 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5290 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5291 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5292 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5293 .bss 0x3000 :
5294 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5295@}
5296@end group
5297@end smallexample
5298
5299The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5300this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5301the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5302how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5303script.
5304
5305@smallexample
5306@group
5307extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5308char *src = &_etext;
5309char *dst = &_data;
5310
ea5cae92
NC
5311/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5312while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5313 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5314
ea5cae92 5315/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5316for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5317 *dst = 0;
5318@end group
5319@end smallexample
5320
bbf115d3
L
5321@node Forced Output Alignment
5322@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5323@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5324@cindex forcing output section alignment
5325@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5326You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5327alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5328intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5329
7e7d5768
AM
5330@node Forced Input Alignment
5331@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5332@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5333@cindex forcing input section alignment
5334@cindex input section alignment
5335You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5336SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5337sections, whether larger or smaller.
5338
0c71d759
NC
5339@node Output Section Constraint
5340@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5341@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5342@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5343@cindex constraints on output sections
5344You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5345of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5346read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5347@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5348
252b5132 5349@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5350@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5351@kindex >@var{region}
5352@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5353@cindex memory regions and sections
5354You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5355using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5356
5357Here is a simple example:
5358@smallexample
5359@group
5360MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5361SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5362@end group
5363@end smallexample
5364
5365@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5366@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5367@kindex :@var{phdr}
5368@cindex section, assigning to program header
5369@cindex program headers and sections
5370You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5371using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5372one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5373assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5374@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5375linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5376
5377Here is a simple example:
5378@smallexample
5379@group
5380PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5381SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5382@end group
5383@end smallexample
5384
5385@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5386@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5387@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5388@cindex section fill pattern
5389@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5390You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5391@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5392(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5393within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5394alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5395necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5396of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5397an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5398fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5399other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5400pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5401expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5402
5403You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5404output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5405
5406Here is a simple example:
5407@smallexample
5408@group
563e308f 5409SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5410@end group
5411@end smallexample
5412
5413@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5414@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5415@kindex OVERLAY
5416@cindex overlays
5417An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5418are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5419the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5420copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5421required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5422can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5423than another.
5424
5425Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5426@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5427output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5428command is as follows:
5429@smallexample
5430@group
5431OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5432 @{
5433 @var{secname1}
5434 @{
5435 @var{output-section-command}
5436 @var{output-section-command}
5437 @dots{}
5438 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5439 @var{secname2}
5440 @{
5441 @var{output-section-command}
5442 @var{output-section-command}
5443 @dots{}
5444 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5445 @dots{}
abc9061b 5446 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5447@end group
5448@end smallexample
5449
5450Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5451section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5452section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5453those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5454except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5455sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5456
abc9061b
CC
5457The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5458the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5459
252b5132
RH
5460The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5461addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5462memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5463whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5464and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5465and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5466
56dd11f0
NC
5467If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5468references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5469the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5470sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5471@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5472
5473For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5474provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5475defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5476@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5477the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5478within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5479symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5480
5481At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5482the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5483
5484Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5485@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5486@smallexample
5487@group
5488 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5489 @{
5490 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5491 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5492 @}
5493@end group
5494@end smallexample
5495@noindent
5496This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5497address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5498@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5499following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5500@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5501@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5502
5503C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5504like the following.
5505
5506@smallexample
5507@group
5508 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5509 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5510 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5511@end group
5512@end smallexample
5513
5514Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5515everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5516example could have been written identically as follows.
5517
5518@smallexample
5519@group
5520 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5521 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5522 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5523 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5524 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5525 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5526 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5527@end group
5528@end smallexample
5529
5530@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5531@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5532@kindex MEMORY
5533@cindex memory regions
5534@cindex regions of memory
5535@cindex allocating memory
5536@cindex discontinuous memory
5537The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5538memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5539
5540The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5541memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5542may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5543can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5544set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5545regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5546around to fit into the available regions.
5547
127fcdff
AB
5548A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5549however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5550specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5551@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5552@smallexample
5553@group
a1ab1d2a 5554MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5555 @{
5556 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5557 @dots{}
5558 @}
5559@end group
5560@end smallexample
5561
5562The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5563region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5564Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5565with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5566must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5567add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5568command.
252b5132
RH
5569
5570@cindex memory region attributes
5571The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5572whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5573not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5574@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5575section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5576the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5577them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5578
5579The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5580@table @samp
5581@item R
5582Read-only section
5583@item W
5584Read/write section
5585@item X
5586Executable section
5587@item A
5588Allocatable section
5589@item I
5590Initialized section
5591@item L
5592Same as @samp{I}
5593@item !
c09e9a8c 5594Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5595@end table
5596
81c688d5 5597If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5598@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5599attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5600unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5601not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5602string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5603or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5604the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5605
5606@kindex ORIGIN =
5607@kindex o =
5608@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5609The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5610the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5611cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5612abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5613@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5614
5615@kindex LENGTH =
5616@kindex len =
5617@kindex l =
5618The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5619region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5620be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5621@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5622
5623In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5624available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5625and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5626linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5627is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5628or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5629explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5630region.
5631
5632@smallexample
5633@group
a1ab1d2a 5634MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5635 @{
5636 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5637 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5638 @}
5639@end group
5640@end smallexample
5641
5642Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5643specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5644@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5645a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5646output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5647was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5648the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5649output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5650region, the linker will issue an error message.
5651
3ec57632 5652It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5653expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5654@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5655
5656@smallexample
5657@group
c0065db7 5658 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5659@end group
5660@end smallexample
5661
252b5132
RH
5662@node PHDRS
5663@section PHDRS Command
5664@kindex PHDRS
5665@cindex program headers
5666@cindex ELF program headers
5667@cindex program segments
5668@cindex segments, ELF
5669The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5670@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5671loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5672program with the @samp{-p} option.
5673
5674When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5675reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5676program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5677This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5678interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5679
5680The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5681in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5682precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5683the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5684not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5685
5686The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5687generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5688ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5689
5690This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5691@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5692
5693@smallexample
5694@group
5695PHDRS
5696@{
5697 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5698 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5699@}
5700@end group
5701@end smallexample
5702
5703The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5704of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5705header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5706with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5707must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5708is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5709
5710Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5711system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5712specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5713sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5714attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5715Section Phdr}.
5716
5717It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5718merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5719repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5720contain the section.
5721
5722If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5723then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5724not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5725convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5726placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5727default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5728segment at all.
5729
5730@kindex FILEHDR
5731@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5732You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5733the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5734The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5735file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5736include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5737segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5738these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5739
5740The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5741value of the keyword.
5742
5743@table @asis
5744@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5745Indicates an unused program header.
5746
5747@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5748Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5749the file.
5750
5751@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5752Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5753
5754@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5755Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5756found.
5757
5758@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5759Indicates a segment holding note information.
5760
5761@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5762A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5763ABI.
5764
5765@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5766Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5767
1a9ccd70
NC
5768@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5769Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5770
252b5132
RH
5771@item @var{expression}
5772An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5773be used for types not defined above.
5774@end table
5775
5776You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5777in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5778@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5779Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5780output section attribute.
5781
5782The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5783which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5784explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5785an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5786header.
5787
5788Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5789headers used on a native ELF system.
5790
5791@example
5792@group
5793PHDRS
5794@{
5795 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5796 interp PT_INTERP ;
5797 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5798 data PT_LOAD ;
5799 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5800@}
5801
5802SECTIONS
5803@{
5804 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5805 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5806 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5807 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5808 @dots{}
5809 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5810 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5811 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5812 @dots{}
5813@}
5814@end group
5815@end example
5816
5817@node VERSION
5818@section VERSION Command
5819@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5820@cindex symbol versions
5821@cindex version script
5822@cindex versions of symbols
5823The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5824only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5825symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5826a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5827shared library.
5828
5829You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5830you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5831also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5832
5833The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5834@smallexample
5835VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5836@end smallexample
5837
5838The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5839Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5840version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5841version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5842version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5843scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5844library.
5845
5846The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5847examples.
5848
5849@smallexample
5850VERS_1.1 @{
5851 global:
5852 foo1;
5853 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5854 old*;
5855 original*;
5856 new*;
252b5132
RH
5857@};
5858
5859VERS_1.2 @{
5860 foo2;
5861@} VERS_1.1;
5862
5863VERS_2.0 @{
5864 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5865 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5866 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5867 "f(int, double)";
5868 @};
252b5132
RH
5869@} VERS_1.2;
5870@end smallexample
5871
5872This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5873version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5874The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5875a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5876of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5877symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5878is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5879in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5880However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5881name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5882
5883Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5884depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5885to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5886
5887Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5888depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5889and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5890
5891When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5892specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5893unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5894unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5895somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5896wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5897wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5898set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5899ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5900
5901The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5902they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5903could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5904However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5905
0f6bf451 5906Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5907in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5908symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5909won't.
5910
5911@smallexample
7c9c73be 5912@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5913@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5914
252b5132
RH
5915When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5916symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5917requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5918shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5919loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5920linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5921application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5922way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5923all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5924search for each symbol reference.
5925
5926The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5927doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5928that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5929functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5930the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5931required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5932that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5933versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5934the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5935
5936There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5937first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5938source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5939script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5940maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5941@smallexample
5942__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5943@end smallexample
5944@noindent
5945in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5946be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5947The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5948@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5949takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5950
5951The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5952function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5953an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5954version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5955linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5956
5957To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5958source file. Here is an example:
5959
5960@smallexample
5961__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5962__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5963__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5964__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5965@end smallexample
5966
5967In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5968unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5969example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5970@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5971
5972When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5973some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5974this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5975@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5976declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5977you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5978
5979If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5980within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5981(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5982specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5983
cb840a31
L
5984You can also specify the language in the version script:
5985
5986@smallexample
5987VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5988@end smallexample
5989
c0065db7 5990The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5991The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5992demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5993patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5994@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5995
86043bbb
MM
5996Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5997described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5998or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5999the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
6000whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
6001cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
6002might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
6003should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
6004expect when you upgrade.
6005
252b5132
RH
6006@node Expressions
6007@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
6008@cindex expressions
6009@cindex arithmetic
6010The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
6011that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
6012expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
6013host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
6014
6015You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
6016
6017The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
6018expressions.
6019
6020@menu
6021* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 6022* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 6023* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 6024* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
6025* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
6026* Operators:: Operators
6027* Evaluation:: Evaluation
6028* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
6029* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
6030@end menu
6031
6032@node Constants
6033@subsection Constants
6034@cindex integer notation
6035@cindex constants in linker scripts
6036All constants are integers.
6037
6038As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
6039octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 6040hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 6041@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
6042@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
6043value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
6044
6045@cindex scaled integers
6046@cindex K and M integer suffixes
6047@cindex M and K integer suffixes
6048@cindex suffixes for integers
6049@cindex integer suffixes
6050In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
6051constant by
6052@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6053@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6054@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6055@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
6056@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6057@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6058@tex
6059${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
6060@end tex
6061@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
6062respectively. For example, the following
6063all refer to the same quantity:
6064
252b5132 6065@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6066_fourk_1 = 4K;
6067_fourk_2 = 4096;
6068_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 6069_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
6070@end smallexample
6071
8a308ae8
NC
6072Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
6073conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
6074
0c71d759
NC
6075@node Symbolic Constants
6076@subsection Symbolic Constants
6077@cindex symbolic constants
6078@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 6079It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
6080the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
6081
6082@table @code
6083@item MAXPAGESIZE
6084@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
6085The target's maximum page size.
6086
6087@item COMMONPAGESIZE
6088@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
6089The target's default page size.
6090@end table
6091
6092So for example:
6093
6094@smallexample
9d5777a3 6095 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
6096@end smallexample
6097
6098will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6099supported by the target.
6100
252b5132
RH
6101@node Symbols
6102@subsection Symbol Names
6103@cindex symbol names
6104@cindex names
6105@cindex quoted symbol names
6106@kindex "
6107Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6108and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6109Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6110specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6111keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6112@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6113"SECTION" = 9;
6114"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
6115@end smallexample
6116
6117Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6118to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6119whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6120
ecca9871
L
6121@node Orphan Sections
6122@subsection Orphan Sections
6123@cindex orphan
6124Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6125are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6126script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
6127output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6128in which to place the orphaned input section.
6129
6130If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6131an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6132placed at the end of that output section.
6133
6134If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6135sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6136name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6137orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6138one new output section.
6139
6140If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6141then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
6142in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6143linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6144attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6145sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6146support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 6147
a05a5b64
TP
6148The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6149(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
6150output sections an orphan is placed in.
6151
252b5132
RH
6152@node Location Counter
6153@subsection The Location Counter
6154@kindex .
6155@cindex dot
6156@cindex location counter
6157@cindex current output location
6158The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6159current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6160location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6161within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6162anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6163
6164@cindex holes
6165Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6166moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6167location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6168and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6169doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6170
6171@smallexample
6172SECTIONS
6173@{
6174 output :
6175 @{
6176 file1(.text)
6177 . = . + 1000;
6178 file2(.text)
6179 . += 1000;
6180 file3(.text)
563e308f 6181 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6182@}
6183@end smallexample
6184@noindent
6185In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6186located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6187followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6188@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6189@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6190specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6191
5c6bbab8
NC
6192@cindex dot inside sections
6193Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6194current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6195statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6196absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6197however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6198not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6199
6200@smallexample
6201SECTIONS
6202@{
6203 . = 0x100
6204 .text: @{
6205 *(.text)
6206 . = 0x200
6207 @}
6208 . = 0x500
6209 .data: @{
6210 *(.data)
6211 . += 0x600
6212 @}
6213@}
6214@end smallexample
6215
6216The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6217and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6218the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6219much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6220move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6221and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6222the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6223the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6224
b5666f2f
AM
6225@cindex dot outside sections
6226Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6227output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6228needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6229
6230@smallexample
6231SECTIONS
6232@{
6233 start_of_text = . ;
6234 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6235 end_of_text = . ;
6236
6237 start_of_data = . ;
6238 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6239 end_of_data = . ;
6240@}
6241@end smallexample
6242
6243If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6244not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6245between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6246should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6247blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6248the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6249sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6250statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6251special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6252place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6253as follows:
6254
6255@smallexample
6256SECTIONS
6257@{
6258 start_of_text = . ;
6259 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6260 end_of_text = . ;
6261
6262 start_of_data = . ;
6263 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6264 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6265 end_of_data = . ;
6266@}
6267@end smallexample
6268
6269This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6270@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6271placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6272assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6273a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6274section. So you could write:
6275
6276@smallexample
6277SECTIONS
6278@{
6279 start_of_text = . ;
6280 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6281 end_of_text = . ;
6282
6283 . = . ;
6284 start_of_data = . ;
6285 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6286 end_of_data = . ;
6287@}
6288@end smallexample
6289
6290Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6291@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6292
252b5132
RH
6293@need 2000
6294@node Operators
6295@subsection Operators
6296@cindex operators for arithmetic
6297@cindex arithmetic operators
6298@cindex precedence in expressions
6299The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6300the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6301@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6302@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6303@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6304@smallexample
6305precedence associativity Operators Notes
6306(highest)
63071 left ! - ~ (1)
63082 left * / %
63093 left + -
63104 left >> <<
63115 left == != > < <= >=
63126 left &
63137 left |
63148 left &&
63159 left ||
631610 right ? :
631711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6318(lowest)
6319@end smallexample
6320Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6321(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6322(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6323@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6324@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6325@tex
6326\vskip \baselineskip
6327%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6328\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6329\hrule
6330\halign
6331{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6332height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6333&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6334height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6335\noalign{\hrule}
6336height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6337&highest&&&&&\cr
6338% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6339&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6340&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6341&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6342&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6343&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6344&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6345&7&&left&&|&\cr
6346&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6347&9&&left&&||&\cr
6348&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6349&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6350&lowest&&&&&\cr
6351height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6352\hrule}
6353@end tex
6354@iftex
6355{
6356@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6357@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6358@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6359}
6360@end iftex
6361@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6362
6363@node Evaluation
6364@subsection Evaluation
6365@cindex lazy evaluation
6366@cindex expression evaluation order
6367The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6368an expression when absolutely necessary.
6369
6370The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6371address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6372regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6373as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6374
6375However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6376until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6377other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6378for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6379
6380The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6381assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6382allocation.
6383
6384Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6385@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6386
6387If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6388available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6389following
6390@smallexample
6391@group
6392SECTIONS
6393 @{
a1ab1d2a 6394 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6395 @{ *(.text) @}
6396 @}
6397@end group
6398@end smallexample
6399@noindent
6400will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6401address}.
6402
6403@node Expression Section
6404@subsection The Section of an Expression
6405@cindex expression sections
6406@cindex absolute expressions
6407@cindex relative expressions
6408@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6409@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6410@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6411Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6412relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6413using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6414value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6415symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6416operations.
6417
abf4be64
AM
6418Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6419section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6420address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6421@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6422functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6423One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6424(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6425differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6426versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6427section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6428Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6429absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6430given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6431everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6432
6433In the following simple example,
252b5132 6434
7542af2a
AM
6435@smallexample
6436@group
6437SECTIONS
6438 @{
6439 . = 0x100;
6440 __executable_start = 0x100;
6441 .data :
6442 @{
6443 . = 0x10;
6444 __data_start = 0x10;
6445 *(.data)
6446 @}
6447 @dots{}
6448 @}
6449@end group
6450@end smallexample
252b5132 6451
7542af2a
AM
6452both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6453address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6454@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6455section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6456
5c3049d2
AM
6457For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6458addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6459
6460@itemize @bullet
6461@item
c05f749e
AM
6462Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6463operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6464absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6465@item
7542af2a
AM
6466Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6467relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6468and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6469@item
c05f749e
AM
6470Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6471in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6472address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6473before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6474@end itemize
6475
6476The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6477
6478@itemize @bullet
6479@item
6480An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6481@item
6482The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6483@item
9bc8bb33 6484The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6485relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6486(after above conversions) is also a number when
6487@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6488but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6489@item
6490The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6491relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6492section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6493@item
6494The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6495conversions) is an absolute address.
6496@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6497
6498You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6499to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6500create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6501section @samp{.data}:
6502@smallexample
6503SECTIONS
6504 @{
6505 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6506 @}
6507@end smallexample
6508@noindent
6509If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6510@samp{.data} section.
6511
7542af2a
AM
6512Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6513particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6514
252b5132
RH
6515@node Builtin Functions
6516@subsection Builtin Functions
6517@cindex functions in expressions
6518The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6519use in linker script expressions.
6520
6521@table @code
6522@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6523@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6524@cindex expression, absolute
6525Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6526of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6527value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6528normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6529
6530@item ADDR(@var{section})
6531@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6532@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6533Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6534script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6535the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6536@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6537@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6538the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6539@smallexample
6540@group
6541SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6542 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6543 @{
252b5132
RH
6544 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6545 @dots{}
6546 @}
6547 .output :
6548 @{
6549 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6550 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6551 @}
6552@dots{} @}
6553@end group
6554@end smallexample
6555
876f4090
NS
6556@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6557@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6558@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6559@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6560@cindex round up location counter
6561@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6562@cindex round up expression
6563@cindex align expression
6564Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6565to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6566doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6567arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6568expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6569equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6570
6571Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6572next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6573variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6574input sections:
252b5132
RH
6575@smallexample
6576@group
6577SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6578 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6579 *(.data)
6580 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6581 @}
6582@dots{} @}
6583@end group
6584@end smallexample
6585@noindent
6586The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6587a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6588a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6589of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6590
6591The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6592
362c1d1a
NS
6593@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6594@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6595@cindex section alignment
6596Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6597been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6598evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6599the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6600value in that section.
6601@smallexample
6602@group
6603SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6604 .output @{
6605 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6606 @dots{}
6607 @}
6608@dots{} @}
6609@end group
6610@end smallexample
6611
252b5132
RH
6612@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6613@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6614This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6615scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6616section.
6617
2d20f7bf
JJ
6618@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6619@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6620This is equivalent to either
6621@smallexample
6622(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6623@end smallexample
6624or
6625@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6626(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6627 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6628@end smallexample
6629@noindent
6630depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6631for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6632@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6633If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6634memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6635bytes in the on-disk file.
6636
6637This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6638any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6639@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6640be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6641running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6642that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6643page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6644
6645@noindent
6646Example:
6647@smallexample
6648 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6649@end smallexample
6650
6651@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6652@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6653This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6654evaluation purposes.
6655
6656@smallexample
6657 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6658@end smallexample
6659
a4f5ad88
JJ
6660@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6661@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6662This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6663@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6664When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6665does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6666@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6667argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6668script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6669@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6670padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6671section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6672
6673@smallexample
6674 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6675@end smallexample
6676
252b5132
RH
6677@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6678@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6679@cindex symbol defaults
6680Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6681defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6682return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6683default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6684shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6685the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6686existed, its value is preserved:
6687
6688@smallexample
6689@group
6690SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6691 .text : @{
6692 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6693 @dots{}
6694 @}
6695 @dots{}
6696@}
6697@end group
6698@end smallexample
6699
3ec57632
NC
6700@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6701@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6702Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6703
252b5132
RH
6704@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6705@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6706@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6707Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6708Section LMA}).
6709
2e53f7d6
NC
6710@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6711@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6712Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6713@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6714
252b5132
RH
6715@kindex MAX
6716@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6717Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6718
6719@kindex MIN
6720@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6721Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6722
6723@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6724@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6725@cindex unallocated address, next
6726Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6727This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6728use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6729output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6730
3ec57632
NC
6731@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6732@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6733Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6734
ba916c8a
MM
6735@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6736@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6737Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6738value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6739@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6740will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6741can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6742``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6743name.
6744
252b5132
RH
6745@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6746@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6747@cindex section size
6748Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6749been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6750evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6751@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6752@smallexample
6753@group
6754SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6755 .output @{
6756 .start = . ;
6757 @dots{}
6758 .end = . ;
6759 @}
6760 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6761 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6762@dots{} @}
6763@end group
6764@end smallexample
6765
6766@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6767@itemx sizeof_headers
6768@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6769@cindex header size
6770Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6771information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6772this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6773choose, to facilitate paging.
6774
6775@cindex not enough room for program headers
6776@cindex program headers, not enough room
6777When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6778@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6779number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6780addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6781additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6782room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6783the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6784script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6785you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6786command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6787@end table
6788
6789@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6790@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6791@cindex implicit linker scripts
6792If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6793an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6794linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6795linker will report an error.
6796
6797An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6798
6799Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6800assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6801commands.
6802
6803Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6804at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6805read. This can affect archive searching.
6806
6807@ifset GENERIC
6808@node Machine Dependent
6809@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6810
6811@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6812@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6813sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6814functionality are not listed.
6815
6816@menu
36f63dca
NC
6817@ifset H8300
6818* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6819@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6820@ifset M68HC11
6821* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6822@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6823@ifset ARM
6824* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6825@end ifset
6826@ifset HPPA
6827* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6828@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6829@ifset M68K
6830* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6831@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6832@ifset MIPS
6833* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6834@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6835@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6836* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6837@end ifset
2469cfa2 6838@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6839* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6840@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6841@ifset NDS32
6842* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6843@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6844@ifset NIOSII
6845* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6846@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6847@ifset POWERPC
6848* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6849@end ifset
6850@ifset POWERPC64
6851* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6852@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6853@ifset S/390
6854* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6855@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6856@ifset SPU
6857* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6858@end ifset
74459f0e 6859@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6860* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6861@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6862@ifset WIN32
6863* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6864@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6865@ifset XTENSA
6866* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6867@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6868@end menu
6869@end ifset
6870
252b5132
RH
6871@ifset H8300
6872@ifclear GENERIC
6873@raisesections
6874@end ifclear
6875
6876@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6877@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6878
6879@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6880For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6881you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6882
6883@table @emph
6884@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6885@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6886@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6887targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6888program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6889respectively.
6890
6891@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6892@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6893@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6894@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6895sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6896page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6897(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6898@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6899top page of memory).
1502569c 6900
81f5558e
NC
6901@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6902indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6903displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6904the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6905@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6906whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6907range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6908
1502569c 6909@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6910@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6911biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6912which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6913page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6914(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6915@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6916the top page of memory).
6917
6918@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6919@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
692032 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6921changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6922(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6923@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6924the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6925@end table
6926
6927@ifclear GENERIC
6928@lowersections
6929@end ifclear
6930@end ifset
6931
36f63dca 6932@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6933@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6934@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6935@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6936@node Renesas
6937@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6938
c2dcd04e
NC
6939@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6940H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6941options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6942@end ifset
6943@end ifclear
6944
36f63dca
NC
6945@ifset ARM
6946@ifclear GENERIC
6947@raisesections
6948@end ifclear
6949
93fd0973
SC
6950@ifset M68HC11
6951@ifclear GENERIC
6952@raisesections
6953@end ifclear
6954
6955@node M68HC11/68HC12
6956@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6957
6958@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6959
6960@subsection Linker Relaxation
6961
6962For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6963optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6964
6965@table @emph
6966@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6967@item relaxing address modes
6968@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6969targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6970program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6971respectively.
6972
6973@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6974transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6975page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6976
6977@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6978When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6979of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6980addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6981@code{bset} instructions.
6982
6983@end table
6984
6985@subsection Trampoline Generation
6986
6987@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6988@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6989For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6990call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6991will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6992trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6993case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6994point to the function trampoline.
6995
6996@ifclear GENERIC
6997@lowersections
6998@end ifclear
6999@end ifset
7000
36f63dca 7001@node ARM
3674e28a 7002@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
7003
7004@cindex ARM interworking support
7005@kindex --support-old-code
7006For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 7007between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
7008been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
7009line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
7010libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 7011option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
7012given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
7013which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
7014the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
7015non-interworking aware Thumb code.
7016
7017@cindex thumb entry point
7018@cindex entry point, thumb
7019@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
7020The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
7021@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
7022But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
7023branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
7024executing in Thumb mode straight away.
7025
ce11ba6c
KT
7026@cindex PE import table prefixing
7027@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
7028The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
7029the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 7030element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
7031import tables. By default this option is turned off.
7032
e489d0ae
PB
7033@cindex BE8
7034@kindex --be8
7035The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
7036executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
7037objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
7038option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
7039little-endian code.
e489d0ae 7040
3674e28a
PB
7041@cindex TARGET1
7042@kindex --target1-rel
7043@kindex --target1-abs
7044The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
7045@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
7046or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
7047and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
7048
7049@cindex TARGET2
7050@kindex --target2=@var{type}
7051The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
7052@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
7053meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
7054@table @samp
7055@item rel
eeac373a
PB
7056@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
7057@item abs
7058@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
7059@item got-rel
7060@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
7061@end table
7062
319850b4
JB
7063@cindex FIX_V4BX
7064@kindex --fix-v4bx
7065The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
7066specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
7067interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
7068also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
7069
7070In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
7071linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
7072@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
7073
7074In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7075relocations are ignored.
7076
845b51d6
PB
7077@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
7078@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
7079Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7080relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
7081
7082@smallexample
7083TST rM, #1
7084MOVEQ PC, rM
7085BX Rn
7086@end smallexample
7087
7088This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
7089and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 7090condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 7091
33bfe774
JB
7092@cindex USE_BLX
7093@kindex --use-blx
7094The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7095BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7096situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7097code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7098each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7099
7100This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7101specify it if you are using that target.
7102
c6dd86c6
JB
7103@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7104@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7105The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7106bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7107instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7108to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7109the support code can read the intended values.
7110
7111The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7112intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7113and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7114intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7115full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7116you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7117
7118If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7119enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7120@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7121mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7122vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7123@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7124
7125If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7126potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7127such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7128first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7129instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7130the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7131are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7132
2de70689
MGD
7133@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7134@kindex --fix-arm1176
7135@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
7136The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7137in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7138are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
7139unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7140
9d5777a3 7141Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 7142Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
7143http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7144
a504d23a
LA
7145@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7146@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7147
7148The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7149workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7150the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7151off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7152the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7153core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7154integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7155VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7156
7157The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7158necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7159
7160The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7161@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7162STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7163linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7164@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7165
7166If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7167potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7168such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7169replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7170branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7171then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7172
7173The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7174the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7175
7176The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7177they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7178there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7179occurs.
7180
7181The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7182PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7183large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7184cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7185occurs.
7186
bf21ed78
MS
7187@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7188@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7189The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7190warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7191enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7192linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7193using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7194not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7195
7196@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7197@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7198The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7199warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7200@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7201linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7202using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7203
726150b7
NC
7204@cindex PIC_VENEER
7205@kindex --pic-veneer
7206The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7207ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7208is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7209@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7210
7211@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7212@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7213The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7214code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7215perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7216placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7217controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7218The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7219duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7220group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7221code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7222where they should be placed.
7223
7224The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7225@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7226placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7227branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7228placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7229value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7230exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7231A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7232linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7233from the input sections.
7234
7235The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7236@samp{N = +1}.
7237
1a51c1a4
NC
7238Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7239only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7240otherwise.
7241
1db37fe6
YG
7242@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7243@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7244@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7245The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7246
7247The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7248
68fcca92
JW
7249@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7250@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7251@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7252The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7253
7254Please contact ARM for further details.
7255
1db37fe6
YG
7256@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7257@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7258@cindex Merging exidx entries
7259The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7260
7261@kindex --long-plt
7262@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7263The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7264which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7265entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7266
1f56df9d
JW
7267@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7268@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7269The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7270link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7271
4ba2ef8f
TP
7272@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7273All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7274Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7275@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7276veneers in memory.
7277
54ddd295
TP
7278@kindex --cmse-implib
7279@cindex Secure gateway import library
7280The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7281specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7282secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7283executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7284
0955507f
TP
7285@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7286@cindex Input import library
7287The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7288must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7289given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7290in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7291@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7292library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7293library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7294for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7295specified.
7296
36f63dca
NC
7297@ifclear GENERIC
7298@lowersections
7299@end ifclear
7300@end ifset
7301
7302@ifset HPPA
7303@ifclear GENERIC
7304@raisesections
7305@end ifclear
7306
7307@node HPPA ELF32
7308@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7309@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7310@kindex --multi-subspace
7311When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7312import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7313The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7314stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7315multiple sub-spaces.
7316
7317@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7318@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7319Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7320stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7321@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7322sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7323a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7324the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7325conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7326prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7327A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7328branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7329@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7330@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7331detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7332positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7333
7334Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7335single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7336create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7337large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7338
7339@ifclear GENERIC
7340@lowersections
7341@end ifclear
7342@end ifset
7343
7fb9f789
NC
7344@ifset M68K
7345@ifclear GENERIC
7346@raisesections
7347@end ifclear
7348
7349@node M68K
7350@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7351
7352@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7353@kindex --got=@var{type}
7354The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7355The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7356@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7357the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7358@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7359entries only at non-negative offsets.
7360@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7361entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7362support such GOTs.
7363@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7364output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7365file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7366files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7367
7368@ifclear GENERIC
7369@lowersections
7370@end ifclear
7371@end ifset
7372
833794fc
MR
7373@ifset MIPS
7374@ifclear GENERIC
7375@raisesections
7376@end ifclear
7377
7378@node MIPS
7379@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7380
7381@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7382@kindex --insn32
7383@kindex --no-insn32
7384The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7385microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7386in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7387used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7388or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7389including 16-bit ones where possible.
7390
8b10b0b3
MR
7391@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7392@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7393@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7394The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7395control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7396@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7397relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7398calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7399relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7400instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7401or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7402the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7403
833794fc
MR
7404@ifclear GENERIC
7405@lowersections
7406@end ifclear
7407@end ifset
7408
36f63dca
NC
7409@ifset MMIX
7410@ifclear GENERIC
7411@raisesections
7412@end ifclear
7413
7414@node MMIX
7415@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7416For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7417@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7418understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7419can translate between the two formats.
7420
7421There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7422Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7423registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7424equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7425@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7426global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7427this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7428symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7429
7a2de473
HPN
7430Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7431@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7432The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7433of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7434
7435Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7436are left out from an mmo file.
7437
7438@ifclear GENERIC
7439@lowersections
7440@end ifclear
7441@end ifset
7442
7443@ifset MSP430
7444@ifclear GENERIC
7445@raisesections
7446@end ifclear
7447
7448@node MSP430
7449@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7450For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7451will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7452just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7453
7454@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7455The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7456
7457@table @code
7458@item @samp{.vectors}
7459Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7460
7461@item @samp{.bootloader}
7462Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7463in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7464
7465@item @samp{.infomem}
7466Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7467this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7468
c0065db7 7469@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7470This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7471in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7472
7473@item @samp{.noinit}
7474Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7475
c0065db7 7476The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7477@end table
7478
7ef3addb
JL
7479@table @option
7480@cindex MSP430 Options
7481@kindex --code-region
7482@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7483This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7484argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7485using this option.
7486
7487@kindex --data-region
7488@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7489This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7490[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7491for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7492
7493@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7494@item --disable-sec-transformation
7495Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7496and @code{--data-region} options.
7497This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7498wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7499not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7500@end table
7501
36f63dca
NC
7502@ifclear GENERIC
7503@lowersections
7504@end ifclear
7505@end ifset
7506
35c08157
KLC
7507@ifset NDS32
7508@ifclear GENERIC
7509@raisesections
7510@end ifclear
7511
7512@node NDS32
7513@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7514@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7515For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7516relaxes objects according to these options.
7517
7518@table @code
7519@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7520Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7521
7522@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7523Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7524
7525@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7526Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7527
7528@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7529Export the EX9 table after linking.
7530
7531@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7532Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7533
7534@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7535Update the existing EX9 table.
7536
7537@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7538Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7539
7540@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7541Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7542
7543@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7544Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7545
7546@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7547Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7548@end table
7549
7550@ifclear GENERIC
7551@lowersections
7552@end ifclear
7553@end ifset
7554
78058a5e
SL
7555@ifset NIOSII
7556@ifclear GENERIC
7557@raisesections
7558@end ifclear
7559
7560@node Nios II
7561@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7562@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7563@kindex --relax on Nios II
7564
7565Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7566transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7567which may result in @command{ld} giving
7568@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7569The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7570trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7571outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7572trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7573be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7574larger than 256MB.
7575
7576The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7577is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7578@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7579locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7580source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7581register as a temporary.
7582
7583Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7584relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7585option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7586
7587@ifclear GENERIC
7588@lowersections
7589@end ifclear
7590@end ifset
7591
2a60a7a8
AM
7592@ifset POWERPC
7593@ifclear GENERIC
7594@raisesections
7595@end ifclear
7596
7597@node PowerPC ELF32
7598@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7599@cindex PowerPC long branches
7600@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7601Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7602displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7603@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7604@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7605the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7606section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7607section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7608@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7609both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7610considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7611
7612@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7613@table @option
7614@cindex PowerPC PLT
7615@kindex --bss-plt
7616@item --bss-plt
7617Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7618generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7619the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7620writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7621@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7622PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7623compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7624BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7625
016687f8
AM
7626@kindex --secure-plt
7627@item --secure-plt
7628@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7629@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7630when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7631layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7632style BSS PLT.
7633
2a60a7a8
AM
7634@cindex PowerPC GOT
7635@kindex --sdata-got
7636@item --sdata-got
7637The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7638sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7639@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7640section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7641@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7642@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7643@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7644@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7645PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7646pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7647GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7648really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7649
7650@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7651@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7652@item --emit-stub-syms
7653This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7654symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7655
7656@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7657@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7658@item --no-tls-optimize
7659PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7660sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7661disable the optimization.
7662@end table
7663
7664@ifclear GENERIC
7665@lowersections
7666@end ifclear
7667@end ifset
7668
7669@ifset POWERPC64
7670@ifclear GENERIC
7671@raisesections
7672@end ifclear
7673
7674@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7675@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7676
7677@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7678@table @option
7679@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7680@kindex --stub-group-size
7681@item --stub-group-size
7682Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7683by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7684@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7685sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7686a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7687the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7688conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7689prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7690A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7691branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7692@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7693@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7694detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7695positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7696
7697Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7698single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7699create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7700large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7701
7702@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7703@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7704@item --emit-stub-syms
7705This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7706symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7707
7708@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7709@kindex --dotsyms
7710@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7711@item --dotsyms
7712@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7713These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7714in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7715function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7716code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7717properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7718to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7719@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7720dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7721feature.
7722
7ae4ea7d
AM
7723@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7724@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7725@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7726@item --save-restore-funcs
7727@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7728These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7729provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7730@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7731function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7732link.
7733
2a60a7a8
AM
7734@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7735@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7736@item --no-tls-optimize
7737PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7738sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7739disable the optimization.
7740
7c9cf415
AM
7741@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7742@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7743@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa
AM
7744@kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7745@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
95421fb9
AM
7746@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7747@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa 7748These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7c9cf415
AM
7749stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7750an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7751@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
9e7028aa
AM
7752stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7753generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7754__tls_get_addr_opt.
7755Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7756much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7757an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7758will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7759@option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7760and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7761this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7762Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
5cebc931 7763@option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
9e7028aa 7764register saves.
7c9cf415 7765
2a60a7a8
AM
7766@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7767@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7768@item --no-opd-optimize
7769PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7770corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7771the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7772Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7773
7774@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7775@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7776@item --non-overlapping-opd
7777Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7778@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7779the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7780entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7781
7782@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7783@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7784@item --no-toc-optimize
7785PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7786entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7787reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7788marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7789marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7790relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7791unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7792reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7793discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7794reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7795code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7796optimization.
7797
7798@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7799@kindex --no-multi-toc
7800@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7801If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7802@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7803where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7804entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7805total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7806grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7807TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7808calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7809help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
781064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7811Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7812
7813@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7814@kindex --no-toc-sort
7815@item --no-toc-sort
7816By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7817happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7818placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7819with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7820referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7821@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7822results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7823off this feature.
7824
7825@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7826@kindex --plt-align
7827@kindex --no-plt-align
7828@item --plt-align
7829@itemx --no-plt-align
7830Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7831aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7832boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7833specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7834specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7835if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7836PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7837
7838@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7839@kindex --plt-static-chain
7840@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7841@item --plt-static-chain
7842@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7843Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7844chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7845chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7846
7847@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7848@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7849@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7850@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7851@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7852With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7853lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7854another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7855order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7856memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7857barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7858looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7859seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7860default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7861
7862@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7863@kindex --plt-localentry
7864@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7865@item --plt-localentry
7866@itemx --no-localentry
7867ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7868ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7869(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7870Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7871or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7872functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7873in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7874interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7875including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7876to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7877complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7878care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7879@end table
7880
7881@ifclear GENERIC
7882@lowersections
7883@end ifclear
7884@end ifset
7885
b4cbbe8f
AK
7886@ifset S/390
7887@ifclear GENERIC
7888@raisesections
7889@end ifclear
7890
7891@node S/390 ELF
7892@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7893
7894@cindex S/390 ELF options
7895@table @option
7896
7897@cindex S/390
7898@kindex --s390-pgste
7899@item --s390-pgste
7900This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7901segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7902binaries marked that way.
7903@end table
7904
7905@ifclear GENERIC
7906@lowersections
7907@end ifclear
7908@end ifset
7909
49fa1e15
AM
7910@ifset SPU
7911@ifclear GENERIC
7912@raisesections
7913@end ifclear
7914
7915@node SPU ELF
7916@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7917
7918@cindex SPU ELF options
7919@table @option
7920
7921@cindex SPU plugins
7922@kindex --plugin
7923@item --plugin
7924This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7925
7926@cindex SPU overlays
7927@kindex --no-overlays
7928@item --no-overlays
7929Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7930regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7931@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7932turns off all this special overlay handling.
7933
7934@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7935@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7936@item --emit-stub-syms
7937This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7938symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7939
7940@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7941@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7942@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7943This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7944function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7945on calls to non-overlay regions.
7946
7947@cindex SPU local store size
7948@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7949@item --local-store=lo:hi
7950@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7951the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7952range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7953
c0065db7 7954@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7955@kindex --stack-analysis
7956@item --stack-analysis
7957SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7958unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7959under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7960@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7961@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7962determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7963for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7964for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7965for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7966find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7967and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7968under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7969dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7970is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7971and calls will be given.
7972
c0065db7 7973@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7974@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7975@item --emit-stack-syms
7976This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7977in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7978These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7979functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7980functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7981such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7982The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7983@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7984@end table
7985
7986@ifclear GENERIC
7987@lowersections
7988@end ifclear
7989@end ifset
7990
36f63dca
NC
7991@ifset TICOFF
7992@ifclear GENERIC
7993@raisesections
7994@end ifclear
7995
7996@node TI COFF
7997@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7998@cindex TI COFF versions
7999@kindex --format=@var{version}
8000The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
8001TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
8002also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
8003format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
8004header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
8005
8006@ifclear GENERIC
8007@lowersections
8008@end ifclear
8009@end ifset
8010
2ca22b03
NC
8011@ifset WIN32
8012@ifclear GENERIC
8013@raisesections
8014@end ifclear
8015
8016@node WIN32
8017@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
8018
c0065db7 8019This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
8020See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
8021command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
8022
8023@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8024@cindex import libraries
8025@item import libraries
69da35b5 8026The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 8027libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
8028regular static archives and are handled as any other static
8029archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 8030support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 8031@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 8032
c0065db7
RM
8033@item exporting DLL symbols
8034@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
8035The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
8036
8037@table @emph
8038@item using auto-export functionality
8039@cindex using auto-export functionality
8040By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 8041which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 8042
0a5d968e
NC
8043@itemize
8044@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
8045@item --exclude-symbols
8046@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 8047@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 8048@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
8049@end itemize
8050
09e2aba4
DK
8051When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
8052(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
8053symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
8054often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
8055private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 8056options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
8057exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
8058final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
8059
8060If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
8061command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
8062if either of the following are true:
8063
8064@itemize
8065@item A DEF file is used.
8066@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
8067@end itemize
dc8465bf 8068
c0065db7
RM
8069@item using a DEF file
8070@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
8071Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
8072an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
8073exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
8074name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 8075command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
8076
8077@example
8078gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
8079@end example
8080
0a5d968e
NC
8081Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
8082@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8083
dc8465bf
NC
8084Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
8085
8086@example
4b5bd4e7 8087LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
8088
8089EXPORTS
8090foo
8091bar
8092_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
8093another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8094var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
8095doo = foo == foo2
8096eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 8097@end example
dc8465bf 8098
7fcab871 8099This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
8100symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8101alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8102by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8103@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
8104@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8105export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8106in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8107symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 8108
6b31ad16
DS
8109The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8110name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8111the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8112
b45619c0
NC
8113When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8114library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 8115@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 8116executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
8117
8118With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8119specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 8120non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
8121
8122If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
8123or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8124filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 8125
4b5bd4e7
DS
8126The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8127
8128@example
8129EXPORTS
8130 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8131 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 8132 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 8133@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
8134
8135Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8136@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8137@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8138@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8139Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
8140@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8141string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
8142
8143The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8144
8145@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8146will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8147by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8148linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8149library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8150
8151@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8152The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8153the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8154@code{*_imp__foo}).
8155
8156@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8157well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8158read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8159variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8160the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8161extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8162application will behave unexpectedly.
8163
8164@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8165it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8166symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 8167API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 8168the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 8169
4b5bd4e7
DS
8170See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8171other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8172
8173@cindex creating a DEF file
8174While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8175with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8176
8177@item Using decorations
8178@cindex Using decorations
8179Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8180itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8181declared as:
8182
8183@example
8184__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8185__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8186@end example
8187
8188All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8189any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8190this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8191the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8192
8193Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8194decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8195instead:
8196
8197@example
8198__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8199__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8200@end example
8201
c0065db7
RM
8202This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8203when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8204variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8205code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8206of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8207omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8208@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8209information.
c0065db7 8210@end table
dc8465bf 8211
2ca22b03
NC
8212@cindex automatic data imports
8213@item automatic data imports
8214The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8215by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8216compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8217issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8218code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8219c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8220initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8221decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8222platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8223command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8224The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8225suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8226trigger the feature's use.
8227
c0065db7 8228auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8229additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8230
c0065db7 8231"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8232documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8233
c0065db7
RM
8234The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8235occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8236One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8237below.
8238
8239@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8240For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8241object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8242offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8243field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8244in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8245without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8246The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8247references.
8248
c0065db7
RM
8249The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8250be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8251themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8252runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8253compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8254support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8255run without error on an older system.
8256
c0065db7
RM
8257@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8258enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8259
8260@cindex direct linking to a dll
8261@item direct linking to a dll
8262The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8263including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8264libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8265traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8266libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8267function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8268though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8269storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8270tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8271large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8272
c0065db7 8273Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8274@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8275of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8276perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8277select the dll instead of an import library.
8278
2ca22b03 8279
69da35b5
NC
8280For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8281to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8282
8283@example
45e948fe
NC
8284libxxx.dll.a
8285xxx.dll.a
8286libxxx.a
8287xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8288libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8289cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8290libxxx.dll
8291xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8292@end example
8293
69da35b5
NC
8294before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8295
c0065db7
RM
8296(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8297where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8298@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8299file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8300@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8301
c0065db7
RM
8302Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8303@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8304was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8305various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8306could coexist on the same machine.
8307
2ca22b03
NC
8308The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8309applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8310libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8311
8312@example
8313bin/
8314 cygxxx.dll
8315lib/
8316 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8317 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8318@end example
8319
c0065db7
RM
8320Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8321done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8322
83231. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8324@example
8325gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8326@end example
2ca22b03 8327
69da35b5
NC
8328However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8329(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8330@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8331not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8332
2ca22b03
NC
83332. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8334directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8335should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8336making the app/dll.
8337
8338@example
8339ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8340@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8341
8342Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8343
8344@example
8345gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8346@end example
69da35b5
NC
8347
8348This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8349perfectly legal
8350
8351@example
8352bin/
8353 cygxxx-5.dll
8354lib/
c0065db7 8355 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8356@end example
8357
dc8465bf 8358Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8359even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8360@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8361
8362Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8363wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8364
83651. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8366work with auto-imported data.
8367
dc8465bf
NC
83682. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8369import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8370symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8371for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8372possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8373
45e948fe
NC
83743. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8375critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8376in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8377stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8378
69da35b5 8379So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8380true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8381a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8382binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8383massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8384requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8385will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8386
c0065db7 8387@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8388@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8389@item adding additional names
8390Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8391A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8392exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8393when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8394import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8395
c0065db7 8396@example
dc8465bf
NC
8397LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8398
8399EXPORTS
c0065db7 8400foo
dc8465bf 8401_foo = foo
c0065db7 8402@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8403
8404The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8405
8406Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8407source code using the "weak" attribute:
8408
c0065db7
RM
8409@example
8410void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8411void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8412@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8413
8414See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8415symbols.
8416
8417@item renaming symbols
8418Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8419kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8420@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8421DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8422created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8423
c0065db7 8424@example
dc8465bf
NC
8425LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8426
8427EXPORTS
8428_foo = foo
c0065db7 8429@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8430
8431The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8432@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8433@end table
dc8465bf 8434
0a5d968e 8435Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8436unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8437If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8438@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8439that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8440@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8441renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8442to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8443the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8444In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8445which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8446
8447@cindex weak externals
8448@item weak externals
8449The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8450weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8451defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8452are three variants of weak externals:
8453@itemize
8454@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8455called lazy externals.
8456@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8457This form is not presently implemented.
8458@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8459implemented.
8460@end itemize
8461As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8462are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8463uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8464
8465@cindex aligned common symbols
8466@item aligned common symbols
8467As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8468desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8469the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8470carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8471by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8472tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8473but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8474warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8475
2ca22b03
NC
8476@end table
8477
8478@ifclear GENERIC
8479@lowersections
8480@end ifclear
8481@end ifset
8482
e0001a05
NC
8483@ifset XTENSA
8484@ifclear GENERIC
8485@raisesections
8486@end ifclear
8487
8488@node Xtensa
8489@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8490
8491@cindex Xtensa processors
8492The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8493@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8494specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8495keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8496example, with the command:
8497
8498@smallexample
8499SECTIONS
8500@{
8501 .text : @{
8502 *(.literal .text)
8503 @}
8504@}
8505@end smallexample
8506
8507@noindent
8508@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8509and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8510literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8511interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8512group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8513files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8514and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8515
43cd72b9 8516@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8517@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8518Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8519provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8520is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8521literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8522will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8523location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8524the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8525unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8526@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8527range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8528
8529For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8530to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8531instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8532instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8533instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8534@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8535hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8536By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8537switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8538density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8539instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8540performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8541linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8542a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8543
8544The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8545control the linker:
8546
8547@cindex Xtensa options
8548@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8549@item --size-opt
8550When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8551more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8552no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8553alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8554preserve the correctness of the code.
8555@end table
e0001a05
NC
8556
8557@ifclear GENERIC
8558@lowersections
8559@end ifclear
8560@end ifset
8561
252b5132
RH
8562@ifclear SingleFormat
8563@node BFD
8564@chapter BFD
8565
8566@cindex back end
8567@cindex object file management
8568@cindex object formats available
8569@kindex objdump -i
8570The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8571These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8572object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8573format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8574it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8575associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8576object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8577(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8578list all the formats available for your configuration.
8579
8580@cindex BFD requirements
8581@cindex requirements for BFD
8582As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8583several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8584BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8585formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8586been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8587BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8588may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8589
8590One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8591mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8592useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8593conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8594
8595@menu
8596* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8597@end menu
8598
8599@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8600@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8601@cindex opening object files
8602@include bfdsumm.texi
8603@end ifclear
8604
8605@node Reporting Bugs
8606@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8607@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8608@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8609
ff5dcc92 8610Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8611
8612Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8613it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8614to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8615work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8616@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8617
8618In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8619information that enables us to fix the bug.
8620
8621@menu
8622* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8623* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8624@end menu
8625
8626@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8627@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8628@cindex bug criteria
8629
8630If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8631
8632@itemize @bullet
8633@cindex fatal signal
8634@cindex linker crash
8635@cindex crash of linker
8636@item
8637If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8638@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8639
8640@cindex error on valid input
8641@item
ff5dcc92 8642If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8643
8644@cindex invalid input
8645@item
ff5dcc92 8646If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8647may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8648object files are correct.
8649
8650@item
8651If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8652improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8653@end itemize
8654
8655@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8656@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8657@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8658@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8659
8660A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8661products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8662recommend you contact that organization first.
8663
8664You can find contact information for many support companies and
8665individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8666distribution.
8667
ad22bfe8 8668@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8669Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8670@value{BUGURL}.
8671@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8672
8673The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8674@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8675fact or leave it out, state it!
8676
8677Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8678problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8679assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8680matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8681the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8682location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8683were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8684into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8685specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8686and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8687
8688Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8689the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8690on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8691
8692Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8693bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8694respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8695You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8696
8697To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8698
8699@itemize @bullet
8700@item
ff5dcc92 8701The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8702the @samp{--version} argument.
8703
8704Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8705the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8706
8707@item
ff5dcc92 8708Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8709patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8710
8711@item
8712The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8713version number.
8714
8715@item
ff5dcc92 8716What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8717``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8718
8719@item
8720The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8721observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8722list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8723sufficient.
8724
8725If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8726and then we might not encounter the bug.
8727
8728@item
8729A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8730bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8731provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8732bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8733state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8734requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8735we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8736attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8737
8738If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8739@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8740object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8741@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8742how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8743
8744@item
8745A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8746incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8747
ff5dcc92 8748Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8749will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8750not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8751a chance to make a mistake.
8752
8753Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8754say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8755copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8756C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8757and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8758fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8759you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8760any conclusion from our observations.
8761
8762@item
ff5dcc92 8763If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8764diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8765@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8766If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8767context, not by line number.
8768
8769The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8770sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8771@end itemize
8772
8773Here are some things that are not necessary:
8774
8775@itemize @bullet
8776@item
8777A description of the envelope of the bug.
8778
8779Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8780which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8781changes will not affect it.
8782
8783This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8784will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8785with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8786We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8787
8788Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8789of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8790output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8791less time, and so on.
8792
8793However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8794report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8795
8796@item
8797A patch for the bug.
8798
8799A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8800the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8801a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8802to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8803
ff5dcc92 8804Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8805construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8806through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8807able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8808fixed.
8809
8810And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8811patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8812help us to understand.
8813
8814@item
8815A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8816
8817Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8818things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8819@end itemize
8820
8821@node MRI
8822@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8823@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8824To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8825linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8826alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8827described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8828simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8829@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8830linker commands; these commands are described here.
8831
8832In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8833file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8834features to make use of them.
8835
8836You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8837@samp{-c} command-line option.
8838
8839Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8840command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8841blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8842MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8843issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8844
8845Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8846
8847You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8848lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8849The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8850
8851@table @code
8852@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8853@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8854@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8855Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8856the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8857@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8858your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8859script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8860commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8861input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8862@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8863
8864@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8865@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8866Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8867in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8868
8869@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8870
8871@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8872@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8873Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8874@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8875
8876@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8877@item BASE @var{expression}
8878Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8879absolute addresses) in the output file.
8880
8881@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8882@item CHIP @var{expression}
8883@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8884This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8885
8886@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8887@item END
8888This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8889
8890@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8891@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8892Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8893language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8894
8895@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8896@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8897Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8898@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8899
8900The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8901same line, with no change in its effect.
8902
8903@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8904@item LOAD @var{filename}
8905@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8906Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8907same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8908command line.
8909
8910@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8911@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8912@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8913MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8914option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8915
8916@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8917@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8918@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8919Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8920order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8921script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8922sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8923file, in the order specified.
8924
8925@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8926@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8927@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8928@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8929Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8930@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8931
8932@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8933@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8934@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8935@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8936You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8937specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8938If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8939@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8940@end table
8941
793c5807
NC
8942@node GNU Free Documentation License
8943@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8944@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8945
370b66a1
CD
8946@node LD Index
8947@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8948
8949@printindex cp
8950
8951@tex
7ca01ed9 8952% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8953% meantime:
8954\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8955\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8956\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8957\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8958\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8959\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8960\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8961\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8962\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8963% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8964@end tex
8965
252b5132 8966@bye
This page took 1.596077 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.